# Official Journal L 181/2006

| | ISSN 1725-2555 |
| --- | --- |
| Official Journal
  of the European Union | L 181 |
| | |
| English edition | Legislation | Volume 494 July 2006 |

ISSN 1725-2555

Official Journal

of the European Union

L 181

English edition

Legislation

Volume 494 July 2006

---

| Contents | | II   Acts whose publication is not obligatory | page |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | Council |
| | * | Council Decision of 13 March 2006 amending Decisions 2001/507/EC and 2001/509/EC with a view to making United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UN/ECE) Regulation Nos 109 and 108 on retreaded tyres compulsory | 1 |
| | * | Council Decision of 13 March 2006 on the accession of the Community to United Nations Economic Commission for Europe Regulation No 55 on provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles
   (
  1
  ) | 53 |

Contents

II   Acts whose publication is not obligatory

page

Council

*

Council Decision of 13 March 2006 amending Decisions 2001/507/EC and 2001/509/EC with a view to making United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UN/ECE) Regulation Nos 109 and 108 on retreaded tyres compulsory

1

*

Council Decision of 13 March 2006 on the accession of the Community to United Nations Economic Commission for Europe Regulation No 55 on provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles
   (
  1
  )

(
  1

53

| | | Corrigenda |
| --- | --- | --- |
| | * | Corrigendum to Council Regulation (EC) No 1175/2005 of 18 July 2005 imposing a definitive anti-dumping duty and collecting definitively the provisional duty imposed on imports of barium carbonate originating in the People's Republic of China (OJ L 189 of 21.7.2005) | 111 |

Corrigenda

*

Corrigendum to Council Regulation (EC) No 1175/2005 of 18 July 2005 imposing a definitive anti-dumping duty and collecting definitively the provisional duty imposed on imports of barium carbonate originating in the People's Republic of China (OJ L 189 of 21.7.2005)

111

| | |
| --- | --- |
| | (1)   Text with EEA relevance. |

---

(1)   Text with EEA relevance.

1

| EN | Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.
  The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk. |
| --- | --- |

EN

Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.

The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk.

---

II Acts whose publication is not obligatory

Council

| 4.7.2006 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 181/1 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

4.7.2006

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 181/1

---

COUNCIL DECISION

of 13 March 2006

amending Decisions 2001/507/EC and 2001/509/EC with a view to making United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UN/ECE) Regulation Nos 109 and 108 on retreaded tyres compulsory

(2006/443/EC)

THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community,

Having regard to Council Decision 97/836/EC of 27 November 1997 with a view to accession by the European Community to the Agreement of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe concerning the adoption of uniform technical prescriptions for wheeled vehicles, equipment and parts which can be fitted to and/or be used on wheeled vehicles and the conditions for reciprocal recognition of approvals granted on the basis of these prescriptions (“Revised 1958 Agreement”) (1), and in particular Article 3(3), the second indent of Article 4(2) and Article 4(4) thereof,

Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,

Having regard to the assent of the European Parliament (2),

Whereas:

| (1) | The UN/ECE Regulation Nos 109 and 108 lead to harmonised requirements for the retreading of tyres and to a high level of safety and environmental protection. They enable the free circulation of retreaded tyres. |
| --- | --- |

(1)

The UN/ECE Regulation Nos 109 and 108 lead to harmonised requirements for the retreading of tyres and to a high level of safety and environmental protection. They enable the free circulation of retreaded tyres.

| (2) | By Decision 97/836/EC the Community became a Contracting Party to the UN/ECE Revised 1958 Agreement. By Decisions 2001/507/EC (3) and 2001/509/EC (4) the Community acceded to UN/ECE Regulations 109 and 108, respectively. By acceding to those Regulations, the Community committed to accept them as alternatives to Community legislation, in accordance with the provisions of Articles 2 and 3 of the Revised 1958 Agreement. However, in order to apply those Regulations on a compulsory basis, a provision to that end should be laid down in Community law pursuant to Article 4(4) of Decision 97/836/EC. |
| --- | --- |

(2)

By Decision 97/836/EC the Community became a Contracting Party to the UN/ECE Revised 1958 Agreement. By Decisions 2001/507/EC (3) and 2001/509/EC (4) the Community acceded to UN/ECE Regulations 109 and 108, respectively. By acceding to those Regulations, the Community committed to accept them as alternatives to Community legislation, in accordance with the provisions of Articles 2 and 3 of the Revised 1958 Agreement. However, in order to apply those Regulations on a compulsory basis, a provision to that end should be laid down in Community law pursuant to Article 4(4) of Decision 97/836/EC.

| (3) | In view of the limited scope of the needed regulatory action, it is not appropriate to provide for the compulsory application of both Regulations by adopting a Directive as envisaged in Decisions 2001/507/EC and 2001/509/EC. |
| --- | --- |

(3)

In view of the limited scope of the needed regulatory action, it is not appropriate to provide for the compulsory application of both Regulations by adopting a Directive as envisaged in Decisions 2001/507/EC and 2001/509/EC.

| (4) | Decisions 2001/507/EC and 2001/509/EC should be amended accordingly, |
| --- | --- |

(4)

Decisions 2001/507/EC and 2001/509/EC should be amended accordingly,

HAS DECIDED AS FOLLOWS:

Article 1

Decision 2001/507/EC is amended as follows:

| 1. | The sole Article is replaced by the following:
  “Sole Article
  The European Community shall accede to Regulation 109 of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe concerning the approval for the production of retreaded pneumatic tyres for commercial vehicles and their trailers.
  As from 13 September 2006 the provisions of Regulation 109 as set out in the Annex shall apply as a compulsory condition for the placing on the market in the Community of retreaded tyres falling under the scope of that Regulation.” |
| --- | --- |

1.

The sole Article is replaced by the following:

“Sole Article

The European Community shall accede to Regulation 109 of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe concerning the approval for the production of retreaded pneumatic tyres for commercial vehicles and their trailers.

As from 13 September 2006 the provisions of Regulation 109 as set out in the Annex shall apply as a compulsory condition for the placing on the market in the Community of retreaded tyres falling under the scope of that Regulation.”

| 2. | The text of UN/ECE Regulation 109 attached to Decision 2001/507/EC is replaced by the text set out in Annex I of this Decision. |
| --- | --- |

2.

The text of UN/ECE Regulation 109 attached to Decision 2001/507/EC is replaced by the text set out in Annex I of this Decision.

Article 2

Decision 2001/509/EC is amended as follows:

| 1. | The sole Article is replaced by the following:
  “Sole Article
  The European Community shall accede to Regulation 108 of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe concerning the approval for the production of retreaded pneumatic tyres for motor vehicles and their trailers.
  As from 13 September 2006 the provisions of Regulation 108 as set out in the Annex shall apply as a compulsory condition for the placing on the market in the Community of retreaded tyres falling under the scope of that Regulation.” |
| --- | --- |

1.

The sole Article is replaced by the following:

“Sole Article

The European Community shall accede to Regulation 108 of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe concerning the approval for the production of retreaded pneumatic tyres for motor vehicles and their trailers.

As from 13 September 2006 the provisions of Regulation 108 as set out in the Annex shall apply as a compulsory condition for the placing on the market in the Community of retreaded tyres falling under the scope of that Regulation.”

| 2. | The text of UN/ECE Regulation 108 attached to Decision 2001/509/EC is replaced by the text set out in Annex II of this Decision. |
| --- | --- |

2.

The text of UN/ECE Regulation 108 attached to Decision 2001/509/EC is replaced by the text set out in Annex II of this Decision.

Done at Brussels, 13 March 2006.

For the Council

The President

M. BARTENSTEIN

---

(1)  OJ L 346, 17.12.1997, p. 78.

1

(2)  Not yet published In the Official Journal.

2

(3)  OJ L 183, 6.7.2001, p. 35.

3

(4)  OJ L 183, 6.7.2001, p. 37.

4

---

ANNEX I

REGULATION NO 109

UNIFORM PROVISIONS CONCERNING THE APPROVAL FOR THE PRODUCTION OF RETREADED PNEUMATIC TYRES FOR COMMERCIAL VEHICLES AND THEIR TRAILERS

(Consolidated text)

CONTENTS

REGULATION

| 1. | Scope |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Markings |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Requirements |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Specifications |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Modifications to the approval |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Production definitely discontinued |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Names and addresses of technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, of test laboratories, and of administrative departments |
| --- | --- |

12.

ANNEXES

| Annex 1 — | Communication concerning the approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a retreading production unit pursuant to Regulation No 109 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1 —

| Annex 2 — | Arrangement of approval mark |
| --- | --- |

Annex 2 —

| Annex 3 — | Arrangement of retread tyre markings |
| --- | --- |

Annex 3 —

| Annex 4 — | List of load indices and corresponding load capacities |
| --- | --- |

Annex 4 —

| Annex 5 — | Tyre size designation and dimensions |
| --- | --- |

Annex 5 —

| Annex 6 — | Method of measuring pneumatic tyres |
| --- | --- |

Annex 6 —

| Annex 7 — | Procedure for load/speed endurance tests |
| --- | --- |

Annex 7 —

| Appendix 1 — | Endurance-test programme |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 1 —

| Appendix 2 — | Relationship between the pressure index and units of pressure |
| --- | --- |

Appendix 2 —

| Annex 8 — | Variation of load capacity with speed: commercial vehicle tyres radial and diagonal ply |
| --- | --- |

Annex 8 —

| Annex 9 — | Explanatory figure |
| --- | --- |

Annex 9 —

1.   SCOPE

This Regulation applies to the production of retreaded tyres intended to be fitted to commercial vehicles and their trailers used on the road. It does not however apply to:

| 1.1. | Retreaded tyres for private (passenger) cars and their trailers. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Retreaded tyres for private (passenger) cars and their trailers.

| 1.2. | Retreaded tyres with a speed capability below 80 km/h. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

Retreaded tyres with a speed capability below 80 km/h.

| 1.3. | Tyres for cycles and motorcycles. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

Tyres for cycles and motorcycles.

| 1.4. | Tyres originally produced without speed symbols and/or load indices. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Tyres originally produced without speed symbols and/or load indices.

| 1.5. | Tyres originally produced without type approval and without either an “E” or “e” mark. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Tyres originally produced without type approval and without either an “E” or “e” mark.

2.   DEFINITIONS — See also figure in Annex 9

For the purpose of this Regulation:

| 2.1. | “Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres” — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

“Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres” — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.

| 2.2. | “Structure” of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular: |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

“Structure” of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:

| 2.2.1. | “Diagonal” or “bias ply” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

“Diagonal” or “bias ply” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.

| 2.2.2. | “Bias belted” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

“Bias belted” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.

| 2.2.3. | “Radial” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.

“Radial” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.

| 2.3. | “Category of use” |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

“Category of use”

| 2.3.1. | Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1.

Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.

| 2.3.2. | Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2.

Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.

| 2.3.3. | Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.3.

Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.

| 2.4. | “Bead” means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

“Bead” means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.

| 2.5. | “Cord” means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

“Cord” means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre.

| 2.6. | “Ply” means a layer of “rubber” coated parallel cords. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

“Ply” means a layer of “rubber” coated parallel cords.

| 2.7. | “Belt” applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

“Belt” applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction.

| 2.8. | “Breaker” applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

“Breaker” applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread.

| 2.9. | “Protective breaker” applies to a radial ply tyre and means an optional intermediate ply between the tread and the belt to minimise damage to the belt. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

“Protective breaker” applies to a radial ply tyre and means an optional intermediate ply between the tread and the belt to minimise damage to the belt.

| 2.10. | “Chafer” means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

“Chafer” means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim.

| 2.11. | “Carcass” means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost “rubber” of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

“Carcass” means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost “rubber” of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load.

| 2.12. | “Tread” means that part of a pneumatic-tyre which is designed to come into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion. |
| --- | --- |

2.12.

“Tread” means that part of a pneumatic-tyre which is designed to come into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion.

| 2.13. | “Side wall” means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange. |
| --- | --- |

2.13.

“Side wall” means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange.

| 2.14. | “Lower area of tyre” means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.

“Lower area of tyre” means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim.

| 2.15. | “Tread groove” means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern. |
| --- | --- |

2.15.

“Tread groove” means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.

| 2.16. | “Section width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs. |
| --- | --- |

2.16.

“Section width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.

| 2.17. | “Overall width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs. |
| --- | --- |

2.17.

“Overall width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.

| 2.18. | “Section height” means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter. |
| --- | --- |

2.18.

“Section height” means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.

| 2.19. | “Nominal aspect ratio” means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units. |
| --- | --- |

2.19.

“Nominal aspect ratio” means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.

| 2.20. | “Outer diameter” means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.20.

“Outer diameter” means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre.

| 2.21. | “Tyre size designation” means a designation showing: |
| --- | --- |

2.21.

“Tyre size designation” means a designation showing:

| 2.21.1. | The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.1.

The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.

| 2.21.2. | The nominal aspect ratio except in case of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.2.

The nominal aspect ratio except in case of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.

| 2.21.3. | A conventional number “d” (the “d” symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.3.

A conventional number “d” (the “d” symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.

| 2.21.3.1. | The values of the “d” symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below:






  Nominal rim diameter code (d) | Value of the “d” symbol expressed in mm |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 8
  9
  10
  11
  12
  13
  14 | 203
  229
  254
  279
  305
  330
  356 |
| 15
  16
  17
  18
  19 | 381
  406
  432
  457
  483 |
| 20
  21
  22
  24
  25 | 508
  533
  559
  610
  635 |
| 14,5
  16,5
  17,5
  19,5
  20,5
  22,5
  24,5 | 368
  419
  445
  495
  521
  572
  622 |
| 26
  28
  30 | 660
  711
  762 |

2.21.3.1.

The values of the “d” symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below:

Nominal rim diameter code (d)

Value of the “d” symbol expressed in mm

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

203

229

254

279

305

330

356

15

16

17

18

19

381

406

432

457

483

20

21

22

24

25

508

533

559

610

635

14,5

16,5

17,5

19,5

20,5

22,5

24,5

368

419

445

495

521

572

622

26

28

30

660

711

762

| 2.22. | “Nominal rim diameter (d)” means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted. |
| --- | --- |

2.22.

“Nominal rim diameter (d)” means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.

| 2.23. | “Rim” means the support, either for a tyre-and-tube assembly or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated. |
| --- | --- |

2.23.

“Rim” means the support, either for a tyre-and-tube assembly or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated.

| 2.24. | “Measuring rim” means the rim specified as a “measuring rim width” or “design rim width” for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards. |
| --- | --- |

2.24.

“Measuring rim” means the rim specified as a “measuring rim width” or “design rim width” for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards.

| 2.25. | “Test rim” means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type. |
| --- | --- |

2.25.

“Test rim” means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type.

| 2.26. | “International Tyre Standard” means any one of the following standard documents:






  (a) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): “Standards Manual”; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.26.

“International Tyre Standard” means any one of the following standard documents:

(a)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): “Standards Manual”;

| (b) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): “Engineering Design Information — obsolete data”; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1): “Engineering Design Information — obsolete data”;

| (c) | The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): “Year Book”; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (2): “Year Book”;

| (d) | The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): “Year Book”; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (3): “Year Book”;

| (e) | The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): “Standards Manual”; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (4): “Standards Manual”;

| (f) | The Assiciacao Brasileira de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (5): “Manual de Normal Technicas”; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

The Assiciacao Brasileira de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (5): “Manual de Normal Technicas”;

| (g) | The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): “Data Book”. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (6): “Data Book”.

The tyre standards can be obtained from the following addresses:

| 2.27. | “Chunking” means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.27.

“Chunking” means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.

| 2.28. | “Cord separation” means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating. |
| --- | --- |

2.28.

“Cord separation” means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.

| 2.29. | “Ply separation” means the parting of adjacent plies. |
| --- | --- |

2.29.

“Ply separation” means the parting of adjacent plies.

| 2.30. | “Tread separation” means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass. |
| --- | --- |

2.30.

“Tread separation” means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.

| 2.31. | “Service description” means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.31.

“Service description” means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre.

| 2.32. | “Load index” means a numerical code which indicates the load the tyre can carry at the speed corresponding to the associated speed symbol and when operated in conformity with the service conditions specified by the manufacturer. A pneumatic tyre can have more than one load index to indicate its load capacity when used in single or dual (twin) formation, or to indicate an alternative load capacity (Unique point) on which a load variation in accordance with paragraph 2.35 and Annex 8 to this Regulation is not permitted.
  The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.32.

“Load index” means a numerical code which indicates the load the tyre can carry at the speed corresponding to the associated speed symbol and when operated in conformity with the service conditions specified by the manufacturer. A pneumatic tyre can have more than one load index to indicate its load capacity when used in single or dual (twin) formation, or to indicate an alternative load capacity (Unique point) on which a load variation in accordance with paragraph 2.35 and Annex 8 to this Regulation is not permitted.

The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation.

| 2.33. | “Speed symbol” means: |
| --- | --- |

2.33.

“Speed symbol” means:

| 2.33.1. | An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load index. |
| --- | --- |

2.33.1.

An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load index.

| 2.33.2. | The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below:






  Speed symbol | Corresponding maximum speed (km/h) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| F
  G
  J
  K
  L
  M
  N
  P
  Q
  R
  S
  T
  U
  H | 80
  90
  100
  110
  120
  130
  140
  150
  160
  170
  180
  190
  200
  210 |

2.33.2.

The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below:

Speed symbol

Corresponding maximum speed (km/h)

F

G

J

K

L

M

N

P

Q

R

S

T

U

H

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

| 2.34. | “Unique point” means an additional service description, marked adjacent to the normal service description, but which must not be used for calculating a load capacity variation as defined in paragraph 2.35 and in Annex 8 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.34.

“Unique point” means an additional service description, marked adjacent to the normal service description, but which must not be used for calculating a load capacity variation as defined in paragraph 2.35 and in Annex 8 to this Regulation.

| 2.35. | “Load-capacity variation with speed” means an alternative load capacity for the tyre when used at a speed different from that indicated by the speed symbol in the normal service description. The permissible variations are given in the table in Annex 8 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.35.

“Load-capacity variation with speed” means an alternative load capacity for the tyre when used at a speed different from that indicated by the speed symbol in the normal service description. The permissible variations are given in the table in Annex 8 to this Regulation.

| 2.36. | “Retreading production unit” means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced. |
| --- | --- |

2.36.

“Retreading production unit” means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced.

| 2.37. | “Retreading” means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods: |
| --- | --- |

2.37.

“Retreading” means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:

| 2.37.1. | “Top capping” — replacement of the tread; |
| --- | --- |

2.37.1.

“Top capping” — replacement of the tread;

| 2.37.2. | “Re-capping” — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall; |
| --- | --- |

2.37.2.

“Re-capping” — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;

| 2.37.3. | “Bead to bead” — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.37.3.

“Bead to bead” — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.

| 2.38. | “Casing” is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material. |
| --- | --- |

2.38.

“Casing” is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material.

| 2.39. | “Buffing” is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material. |
| --- | --- |

2.39.

“Buffing” is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material.

| 2.40. | “Repair” is the remedial work carried out to damaged casings within recognised limits. |
| --- | --- |

2.40.

“Repair” is the remedial work carried out to damaged casings within recognised limits.

| 2.41. | “Tread material” is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example: |
| --- | --- |

2.41.

“Tread material” is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:

| 2.41.1. | “Camel-back” — pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.1.

“Camel-back” — pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.

| 2.41.2. | “Strip-wound” — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.2.

“Strip-wound” — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.

| 2.41.3. | “Direct extrusion” — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.3.

“Direct extrusion” — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.

| 2.41.4. | “Pre-cured” — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.4.

“Pre-cured” — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.

| 2.42. | “Sidewall veneer” is a material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed. |
| --- | --- |

2.42.

“Sidewall veneer” is a material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed.

| 2.43. | “Cushion gum” is a material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage. |
| --- | --- |

2.43.

“Cushion gum” is a material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.

| 2.44. | “Cement” is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process. |
| --- | --- |

2.44.

“Cement” is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process.

| 2.45. | “Cure” is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions. |
| --- | --- |

2.45.

“Cure” is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions.

3.   MARKINGS

| 3.1. | An example of the arrangement of retreaded tyre markings is shown in Annex 3 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

An example of the arrangement of retreaded tyre markings is shown in Annex 3 to this Regulation.

| 3.2. | Retreaded tyres shall display on both sidewalls in the case of symmetrical tyres and at least on the outer sidewall in the case of asymmetrical tyres: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

Retreaded tyres shall display on both sidewalls in the case of symmetrical tyres and at least on the outer sidewall in the case of asymmetrical tyres:

| 3.2.1. | The brand name or trade mark; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

The brand name or trade mark;

| 3.2.2. | The tyre-size designation as defined in paragraph 2.21; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

The tyre-size designation as defined in paragraph 2.21;

| 3.2.3. | An indication of the structure as follows: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

An indication of the structure as follows:

| 3.2.3.1. | On diagonal (bias-ply) tyres; no indication, or the letter “D” placed in front of the rim diameter marking; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.1.

On diagonal (bias-ply) tyres; no indication, or the letter “D” placed in front of the rim diameter marking;

| 3.2.3.2. | On radial-ply tyres; the letter “R” placed in front of the rim-diameter marking and optionally the word “RADIAL”; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.2.

On radial-ply tyres; the letter “R” placed in front of the rim-diameter marking and optionally the word “RADIAL”;

| 3.2.3.3. | On bias belted tyres; the letter “B” placed in front of the rim diameter marking and in addition the words “BIAS-BELTED”; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.3.

On bias belted tyres; the letter “B” placed in front of the rim diameter marking and in addition the words “BIAS-BELTED”;

| 3.2.4. | The service description comprising: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

The service description comprising:

| 3.2.4.1. | An indication of the tyre's nominal load capacity/capacities in the form of the load index/indices prescribed in paragraph 2.32; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.1.

An indication of the tyre's nominal load capacity/capacities in the form of the load index/indices prescribed in paragraph 2.32;

| 3.2.4.2. | An indication of the tyre's nominal speed capability in the form of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 2.33; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.2.

An indication of the tyre's nominal speed capability in the form of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 2.33;

| 3.2.5. | If applicable, one alternative service description, the unique point, comprising: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

If applicable, one alternative service description, the unique point, comprising:

| 3.2.5.1. | An indication of the tyre's load capacity/capacities in the form of the load index/indices prescribed in paragraph 2.32; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.1.

An indication of the tyre's load capacity/capacities in the form of the load index/indices prescribed in paragraph 2.32;

| 3.2.5.2. | An indication of the speed capability in the form of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 2.33; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.2.

An indication of the speed capability in the form of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 2.33;

| 3.2.6. | The word “TUBELESS” if the tyre is designed for use without an inner tube. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.

The word “TUBELESS” if the tyre is designed for use without an inner tube.

| 3.2.7. | The inscription M+S or MS or M.S. or M & S in the case of a snow tyre. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.

The inscription M+S or MS or M.S. or M & S in the case of a snow tyre.

| 3.2.8. | The date of retreading as follows: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.

The date of retreading as follows:

| 3.2.8.1. | Up to 31 December 1999; either as prescribed in paragraph 3.2.8.2 or in the form of a group of three digits, the first two showing the week number and the third, the year of the decade of manufacture. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “253” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 1993.
  The date code may be marked on one sidewall only. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.1.

Up to 31 December 1999; either as prescribed in paragraph 3.2.8.2 or in the form of a group of three digits, the first two showing the week number and the third, the year of the decade of manufacture. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “253” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 1993.

The date code may be marked on one sidewall only.

| 3.2.8.2. | As from 1 January 2000; in the form of a group of four digits, the first two showing the week number and the second two showing the year in which the tyre was retreaded. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “2503” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 2003.
  The date code may be marked on one sidewall only. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.2.

As from 1 January 2000; in the form of a group of four digits, the first two showing the week number and the second two showing the year in which the tyre was retreaded. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “2503” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 2003.

The date code may be marked on one sidewall only.

| 3.2.9. | In the case of tyres which can be regrooved, the symbol “

  ” in a circle at least 20 mm diameter, or the word “REGROOVABLE”, moulded into or on to each sidewall. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.9.

Image

| 3.2.10. | An indication, by the means of the “PSI” index, of the inflation pressure to be adopted for the load/speed endurance tests, as explained in Annex 7, Appendix 2, to this Regulation.
  This indication may be placed on one sidewall only. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.10.

An indication, by the means of the “PSI” index, of the inflation pressure to be adopted for the load/speed endurance tests, as explained in Annex 7, Appendix 2, to this Regulation.

This indication may be placed on one sidewall only.

| 3.2.11. | The term “RETREAD” or “REMOULD” (after 1 January 1999 only the word “RETREAD” shall be used). At the request of the retreader, the same term in other languages may also be added. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.11.

The term “RETREAD” or “REMOULD” (after 1 January 1999 only the word “RETREAD” shall be used). At the request of the retreader, the same term in other languages may also be added.

| 3.2.12. | The inscription “ET” or “ML” or “MPT” for “Special use tyres” (7) |
| --- | --- |

3.2.12.

The inscription “ET” or “ML” or “MPT” for “Special use tyres” (7)

| 3.3. | Prior to approval tyres shall exhibit a free space sufficiently large to accommodate an approval mark as referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

Prior to approval tyres shall exhibit a free space sufficiently large to accommodate an approval mark as referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation.

| 3.4. | Following approval, the markings referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation shall be affixed in the free space referred to in paragraph 3.3. This marking may be affixed to one sidewall only. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

Following approval, the markings referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation shall be affixed in the free space referred to in paragraph 3.3. This marking may be affixed to one sidewall only.

| 3.5. | The markings referred to in paragraph 3.2 and the approval mark prescribed in paragraphs 3.4 and 5.8 shall be clearly legible and shall be moulded on to or into the tyre or shall be permanently marked on to the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.

The markings referred to in paragraph 3.2 and the approval mark prescribed in paragraphs 3.4 and 5.8 shall be clearly legible and shall be moulded on to or into the tyre or shall be permanently marked on to the tyre.

| 3.6. | As far as any of the original manufacturer's specifications are still legible after the tyres have been retreaded, they shall be regarded as specifications of the retreader for the retreaded tyre. If these original specifications do not apply after retreading they shall be completely removed. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.

As far as any of the original manufacturer's specifications are still legible after the tyres have been retreaded, they shall be regarded as specifications of the retreader for the retreaded tyre. If these original specifications do not apply after retreading they shall be completely removed.

| 3.7. | The original “E” or “e” approval mark and approval number and any other subsequent retreading production unit's approval mark and number, if no longer applicable, shall be removed. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.

The original “E” or “e” approval mark and approval number and any other subsequent retreading production unit's approval mark and number, if no longer applicable, shall be removed.

4.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

The following procedures are applicable to the approval of a tyre retreading production unit:

| 4.1. | The application for approval of a retreading production unit shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or trade mark to be applied to the tyre or by his duly accredited representative. It shall specify: |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

The application for approval of a retreading production unit shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or trade mark to be applied to the tyre or by his duly accredited representative. It shall specify:

| 4.1.1. | An outline of the structure of the company producing the retreaded tyres. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.1.

An outline of the structure of the company producing the retreaded tyres.

| 4.1.2. | A brief description of the quality management system, which ensures the effective control of the tyre retreading procedures to meet the requirements of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.2.

A brief description of the quality management system, which ensures the effective control of the tyre retreading procedures to meet the requirements of this Regulation.

| 4.1.3. | The trade names or marks to be applied to the retreaded tyres produced. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.3.

The trade names or marks to be applied to the retreaded tyres produced.

| 4.1.4. | The following information in relation to the range of tyres to be retreaded: |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.

The following information in relation to the range of tyres to be retreaded:

| 4.1.4.1. | the range of tyre sizes; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.1.

the range of tyre sizes;

| 4.1.4.2. | the structure of tyres (diagonal or bias ply, bias-belted or radial); |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.2.

the structure of tyres (diagonal or bias ply, bias-belted or radial);

| 4.1.4.3. | the category of use of tyres (normal or snow tyres etc.); |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.3.

the category of use of tyres (normal or snow tyres etc.);

| 4.1.4.4. | the system of retreading and the method of application of the new materials to be used, as defined in paragraphs 2.37 and 2.41; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.4.

the system of retreading and the method of application of the new materials to be used, as defined in paragraphs 2.37 and 2.41;

| 4.1.4.5. | the maximum speed symbol of the tyres to be retreaded; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.5.

the maximum speed symbol of the tyres to be retreaded;

| 4.1.4.6. | the maximum load index of the tyres to be retreaded; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.6.

the maximum load index of the tyres to be retreaded;

| 4.1.4.7. | the nominated International Tyre Standard to which the range of tyres conform. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.7.

the nominated International Tyre Standard to which the range of tyres conform.

5.   APPROVAL

| 5.1. | To retread tyres requires the approval of the retreading production unit by the approval authorities in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation. The approval authority shall take the necessary measures as described in this Regulation in order to ensure that the tyres retreaded in the respective production unit will meet with the requirements stated in this Regulation. The retread production unit shall be fully responsible for ensuring that the retreaded tyres will meet the requirements of this Regulation and that they will perform adequately in normal use. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

To retread tyres requires the approval of the retreading production unit by the approval authorities in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation. The approval authority shall take the necessary measures as described in this Regulation in order to ensure that the tyres retreaded in the respective production unit will meet with the requirements stated in this Regulation. The retread production unit shall be fully responsible for ensuring that the retreaded tyres will meet the requirements of this Regulation and that they will perform adequately in normal use.

| 5.2. | In addition to the normal requirements for the initial assessment of the tyre retreading production unit, the approval authority shall be satisfied that the procedures, operation, instructions and specification documentation provided by material suppliers are in a language readily understood by the tyre retreading production unit operatives. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

In addition to the normal requirements for the initial assessment of the tyre retreading production unit, the approval authority shall be satisfied that the procedures, operation, instructions and specification documentation provided by material suppliers are in a language readily understood by the tyre retreading production unit operatives.

| 5.3. | The approval authority shall ensure that the procedures and operations documentation for each production unit contains specifications, appropriate to the repair materials and processes used, of the limits of repairable damage or penetrations to the tyre carcass, whether such damage is existing or is caused during the processes of preparation for retreading. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

The approval authority shall ensure that the procedures and operations documentation for each production unit contains specifications, appropriate to the repair materials and processes used, of the limits of repairable damage or penetrations to the tyre carcass, whether such damage is existing or is caused during the processes of preparation for retreading.

| 5.4. | Before granting approval the authority must be satisfied that retreaded tyres conform to this Regulation and that the tests prescribed in paragraphs 6.5 and 6.6 have been successfully carried out on at least five and not necessarily more than 20 samples of retreaded tyres representative of the range of tyres produced by the retreading production unit. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.

Before granting approval the authority must be satisfied that retreaded tyres conform to this Regulation and that the tests prescribed in paragraphs 6.5 and 6.6 have been successfully carried out on at least five and not necessarily more than 20 samples of retreaded tyres representative of the range of tyres produced by the retreading production unit.

| 5.5. | In the case of each failure being recorded during tests, two further samples of the same specification tyre shall be tested.
  If either or both of these second two samples fail, then a final submission of two samples shall be tested.
  If either or both of the final two samples fail, then the application for approval of the retreading production unit shall be rejected. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.

In the case of each failure being recorded during tests, two further samples of the same specification tyre shall be tested.

If either or both of these second two samples fail, then a final submission of two samples shall be tested.

If either or both of the final two samples fail, then the application for approval of the retreading production unit shall be rejected.

| 5.6. | If all the requirements of this Regulation are met, then approval shall be granted and an approval number shall be assigned to each retreading production unit approved. The first two digits of this number shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The approval number shall be preceded by “109R” signifying that the approval applies to a tyre retreaded as prescribed in this Regulation.
  The same authority shall not assign the same number to another production unit covered by this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.

If all the requirements of this Regulation are met, then approval shall be granted and an approval number shall be assigned to each retreading production unit approved. The first two digits of this number shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The approval number shall be preceded by “109R” signifying that the approval applies to a tyre retreaded as prescribed in this Regulation.

The same authority shall not assign the same number to another production unit covered by this Regulation.

| 5.7. | Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.

Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

| 5.8. | There shall be affixed conspicuously to every retreaded tyre conforming to this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 3.3 and in addition to the markings prescribed in paragraph 3.2, an international approval mark consisting of: |
| --- | --- |

5.8.

There shall be affixed conspicuously to every retreaded tyre conforming to this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 3.3 and in addition to the markings prescribed in paragraph 3.2, an international approval mark consisting of:

| 5.8.1. | A circle surrounding the letter “E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which granted approval (8); and |
| --- | --- |

5.8.1.

A circle surrounding the letter “E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which granted approval (8); and

| 5.8.2. | An approval number as described in paragraph 5.6. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.2.

An approval number as described in paragraph 5.6.

| 5.9. | Annex 2 to this Regulation gives an example of the arrangements of the approval mark. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.

Annex 2 to this Regulation gives an example of the arrangements of the approval mark.

6.   REQUIREMENTS

| 6.1. | Tyres shall not be accepted for first retread unless they have been type approved and bear either an “E” or “e” mark, except that this requirement shall not be mandatory until 1 January 2000 at the latest. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

Tyres shall not be accepted for first retread unless they have been type approved and bear either an “E” or “e” mark, except that this requirement shall not be mandatory until 1 January 2000 at the latest.

| 6.2. | Conditions before retreading: |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

Conditions before retreading:

| 6.2.1. | Tyres shall be clean and dry before inspection. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.1.

Tyres shall be clean and dry before inspection.

| 6.2.2. | Before buffing, each tyre shall be thoroughly examined both internally and externally to ensure its suitability for retreading. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.

Before buffing, each tyre shall be thoroughly examined both internally and externally to ensure its suitability for retreading.

| 6.2.3. | Tyres where damage is visible which has resulted from overload or underinflation shall not be retreaded. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.3.

Tyres where damage is visible which has resulted from overload or underinflation shall not be retreaded.

| 6.2.4. | Tyres showing any of the following damage shall not be accepted for retreading: |
| --- | --- |

6.2.4.

Tyres showing any of the following damage shall not be accepted for retreading:

| 6.2.4.1. | General:






  (a) | non-repairable rubber cracking extending through to the carcass; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.4.1.

General:

(a)

non-repairable rubber cracking extending through to the carcass;

| (b) | carcas break up; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

carcas break up;

| (c) | appreciable oil or chemical attack; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

appreciable oil or chemical attack;

| (d) | damaged or broken bead core; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

damaged or broken bead core;

| (e) | previous repairs of damage outside specified injury limits — see paragraph 5.3. |
| --- | --- |

(e)

previous repairs of damage outside specified injury limits — see paragraph 5.3.

| 6.2.4.2. | Conditions outside specified limits of repairability — see paragraph 5.3:






  (a) | carcass penetrations or damage after preparation for repair; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.4.2.

Conditions outside specified limits of repairability — see paragraph 5.3:

(a)

carcass penetrations or damage after preparation for repair;

| (b) | multiple damage too close together; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

multiple damage too close together;

| (c) | substantial deterioration of inner liner; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

substantial deterioration of inner liner;

| (d) | bead damage; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

bead damage;

| (e) | exposed carcass cords; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

exposed carcass cords;

| (f) | loose cords; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

loose cords;

| (g) | belt ply separation; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

belt ply separation;

| (h) | permanently deformed or kinked (steel) carcass cords; |
| --- | --- |

(h)

permanently deformed or kinked (steel) carcass cords;

| (i) | circumferential cracking above the bead; |
| --- | --- |

(i)

circumferential cracking above the bead;

| (j) | corroded steel cord or bead wire. |
| --- | --- |

(j)

corroded steel cord or bead wire.

| 6.3. | Preparation: |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

Preparation:

| 6.3.1. | After buffing, and before the application of new material, each tyre shall be thoroughly re-examined, at least externally, to ensure its continued suitability for retreading. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.1.

After buffing, and before the application of new material, each tyre shall be thoroughly re-examined, at least externally, to ensure its continued suitability for retreading.

| 6.3.2. | The entire surface to which new material is to be applied shall have been prepared without overheating. The buffed surface texture shall not contain deep buffing lacerations or loose material. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.2.

The entire surface to which new material is to be applied shall have been prepared without overheating. The buffed surface texture shall not contain deep buffing lacerations or loose material.

| 6.3.3. | Where precured material is to be used the contours of the prepared area shall meet the requirements of the material manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.3.

Where precured material is to be used the contours of the prepared area shall meet the requirements of the material manufacturer.

| 6.3.4. | Damage caused during buffing must not exceed defined limits of repair, see paragraph 5.3, and must be repaired. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.4.

Damage caused during buffing must not exceed defined limits of repair, see paragraph 5.3, and must be repaired.

| 6.3.5. | Buffing damage to diagonal ply tyres shall not extend beyond the outermost carcass ply in the crown area. It shall be assumed that the first ply encountered is a carcass ply unless a breaker can be positively identified. If a breaker is fitted, localised damage is permissible. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.5.

Buffing damage to diagonal ply tyres shall not extend beyond the outermost carcass ply in the crown area. It shall be assumed that the first ply encountered is a carcass ply unless a breaker can be positively identified. If a breaker is fitted, localised damage is permissible.

| 6.3.6. | Localised buffing damage to the belt of radial tyres is permissible. For larger damage it is permissible for the complete belt or sections of the belt to be replaced. Where a protective breaker is fitted, and can be positively identified as such, if it is damaged it is permissible to remove it and it need not be renewed. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.6.

Localised buffing damage to the belt of radial tyres is permissible. For larger damage it is permissible for the complete belt or sections of the belt to be replaced. Where a protective breaker is fitted, and can be positively identified as such, if it is damaged it is permissible to remove it and it need not be renewed.

| 6.3.7. | Exposed steel parts shall be treated as soon as possible with appropriate material as defined by the manufacturer of that appropriate material. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.7.

Exposed steel parts shall be treated as soon as possible with appropriate material as defined by the manufacturer of that appropriate material.

| 6.4. | Retreading: |
| --- | --- |

6.4.

Retreading:

| 6.4.1. | The retreader must ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of repair materials, including patches, is responsible for the following:






  (a) | defining method(s) of application and storage, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.4.1.

The retreader must ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of repair materials, including patches, is responsible for the following:

(a)

defining method(s) of application and storage, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used;

| (b) | defining limits of damage for which the materials are designed, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

defining limits of damage for which the materials are designed, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used;

| (c) | ensuring that reinforced patches for tyres, if correctly applied in carcass repairs, are suitable for the purpose; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

ensuring that reinforced patches for tyres, if correctly applied in carcass repairs, are suitable for the purpose;

| (d) | ensuring that the patches are capable of withstanding twice the maximum inflation pressure as given by the tyre manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

ensuring that the patches are capable of withstanding twice the maximum inflation pressure as given by the tyre manufacturer;

| (e) | ensuring the suitability of any other repair materials for the service intended. |
| --- | --- |

(e)

ensuring the suitability of any other repair materials for the service intended.

| 6.4.2. | The retreader shall be responsible for the correct application of the repair material and for ensuring that the repair is free from any defects which may affect the satisfactory service life of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.2.

The retreader shall be responsible for the correct application of the repair material and for ensuring that the repair is free from any defects which may affect the satisfactory service life of the tyre.

| 6.4.3. | The area surrounding a reinforced repair to a sidewall or shoulder of a radial ply tyre may bulge slightly when the tyre is fitted and inflated to the recommended operating pressure. Reinforced repair materials with physical properties that restrict the height of the bulge to not more than 4 mm shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.3.

The area surrounding a reinforced repair to a sidewall or shoulder of a radial ply tyre may bulge slightly when the tyre is fitted and inflated to the recommended operating pressure. Reinforced repair materials with physical properties that restrict the height of the bulge to not more than 4 mm shall be used.

| 6.4.4. | The retreader shall ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of tread and sidewall material issues specifications concerning the conditions of storage and use of the material in order to guarantee the material's qualities. If requested by the retreader, this information shall be in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.4.

The retreader shall ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of tread and sidewall material issues specifications concerning the conditions of storage and use of the material in order to guarantee the material's qualities. If requested by the retreader, this information shall be in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used.

| 6.4.5. | The retreader must ensure that the repair material and/or compound is documented in a manufacturer's or supplier's certificate. The material compound must be suitable for the intended use of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.5.

The retreader must ensure that the repair material and/or compound is documented in a manufacturer's or supplier's certificate. The material compound must be suitable for the intended use of the tyre.

| 6.4.6. | The processed tyre shall be cured as soon as possible after the completion of all repairs and building-up operations and at the latest according to the material manufacturer's specifications. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.6.

The processed tyre shall be cured as soon as possible after the completion of all repairs and building-up operations and at the latest according to the material manufacturer's specifications.

| 6.4.7. | The tyre shall be cured for the length of time and at the temperature and pressure, appropriate to, and specified for, the materials and processing equipment used. The dimensions of the mould must be appropriate to the thickness of the new material and the size of the buffed tyre. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.7.

The tyre shall be cured for the length of time and at the temperature and pressure, appropriate to, and specified for, the materials and processing equipment used. The dimensions of the mould must be appropriate to the thickness of the new material and the size of the buffed tyre.

| 6.4.8. | The thickness of original material after buffing and the average thickness of any new material under the tread pattern after retreading shall be as given in paragraphs 6.4.8.1 and 6.4.8.2. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.8.

The thickness of original material after buffing and the average thickness of any new material under the tread pattern after retreading shall be as given in paragraphs 6.4.8.1 and 6.4.8.2.

| 6.4.8.1. | For radial ply tyres (mm):
  3 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 13 (minimum 3,0 mm; maximum 13,0 mm)
  A ≥ 2 (minimum 2,0 mm)
  B ≥ 0 (minimum 0,0 mm)










  P.D. | = | Pattern depth |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| X | = | Buff line |
| A | = | Average thickness of new material under pattern |
| B | = | Minimum thickness of original material above belt after buffing |

6.4.8.1.

For radial ply tyres (mm):

3 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 13 (minimum 3,0 mm; maximum 13,0 mm)

A ≥ 2 (minimum 2,0 mm)

B ≥ 0 (minimum 0,0 mm)

Image

P.D.

=

Pattern depth

X

=

Buff line

A

=

Average thickness of new material under pattern

B

=

Minimum thickness of original material above belt after buffing

| 6.4.8.2. | For diagonal (Bias-ply) tyres:
  The thickness of original material above the breaker shall be ≥ 0,80 mm;
  The average thickness of new material above the buffed casing line shall be ≥ 2,00 mm;
  The combined thickness of original and new material beneath the base of the grooves of the tread pattern shall be ≥ 3,00 mm and ≤ 13,00 mm. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.8.2.

For diagonal (Bias-ply) tyres:

The thickness of original material above the breaker shall be ≥ 0,80 mm;

The average thickness of new material above the buffed casing line shall be ≥ 2,00 mm;

The combined thickness of original and new material beneath the base of the grooves of the tread pattern shall be ≥ 3,00 mm and ≤ 13,00 mm.

| 6.4.9. | The service description of a retreaded tyre shall not show either a higher speed symbol or a higher load index than that of the original, first life, tyre unless approval has been granted to the manufacturer of the original, first life, tyre for that same carcass to be used at the revised service description.
  Information that an original, first life, carcass has been upgraded in this way shall be made freely available by an approval authority to any retreading production unit and shall be communicated to other parties to the 1958 Agreement (see Article 5 of the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the basis of these Prescriptions — document E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2).
  The standard form shown in Annex 1 to Regulation No. 54 shall be used to communicate this information. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.9.

The service description of a retreaded tyre shall not show either a higher speed symbol or a higher load index than that of the original, first life, tyre unless approval has been granted to the manufacturer of the original, first life, tyre for that same carcass to be used at the revised service description.

Information that an original, first life, carcass has been upgraded in this way shall be made freely available by an approval authority to any retreading production unit and shall be communicated to other parties to the 1958 Agreement (see Article 5 of the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the basis of these Prescriptions — document E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2).

The standard form shown in Annex 1 to Regulation No. 54 shall be used to communicate this information.

| 6.4.10. | Upgrading of the service description as given in paragraph 6.4.9 shall only be permitted for the first retread of an original, first life tyre.
  Tyres which have been previously retreaded shall not have either the speed symbol or the load index raised above that shown on the used casing. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.10.

Upgrading of the service description as given in paragraph 6.4.9 shall only be permitted for the first retread of an original, first life tyre.

Tyres which have been previously retreaded shall not have either the speed symbol or the load index raised above that shown on the used casing.

| 6.5. | Inspection: |
| --- | --- |

6.5.

Inspection:

| 6.5.1. | After curing, whilst a degree of heat is retained in a tyre, each retreaded tyre shall be examined to ensure that it is free from any apparent defects. During or after retreading the tyre must be inflated to at least 1,5 bar for examination. Where there is any apparent defect in the profile of the tyre (e.g. blister, depression, etc.) the tyre shall be specifically examined to determine the cause of this defect. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.1.

After curing, whilst a degree of heat is retained in a tyre, each retreaded tyre shall be examined to ensure that it is free from any apparent defects. During or after retreading the tyre must be inflated to at least 1,5 bar for examination. Where there is any apparent defect in the profile of the tyre (e.g. blister, depression, etc.) the tyre shall be specifically examined to determine the cause of this defect.

| 6.5.2. | Before, during or after retreading the tyre shall be checked at least once for the integrity of its structure by means of a suitable inspection method. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.2.

Before, during or after retreading the tyre shall be checked at least once for the integrity of its structure by means of a suitable inspection method.

| 6.5.3. | For the purposes of quality control a number of retreaded tyres shall be subjected to destructive or non destructive testing or examination. The quantity of tyres checked and the results shall be recorded. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.3.

For the purposes of quality control a number of retreaded tyres shall be subjected to destructive or non destructive testing or examination. The quantity of tyres checked and the results shall be recorded.

| 6.5.4. | After retreading, the dimensions of the retreaded tyre, when measured in accordance with Annex 6 to this Regulation, must conform either to dimensions calculated according to the procedures in paragraph 7 or to those given in Annex 5 to this Regulation. Note that the maximum outer diameter of a retreaded tyre may be up to 1,5 % greater than the maximum outer diameter of a new, original tyre permitted by Regulation No 54. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.4.

After retreading, the dimensions of the retreaded tyre, when measured in accordance with Annex 6 to this Regulation, must conform either to dimensions calculated according to the procedures in paragraph 7 or to those given in Annex 5 to this Regulation. Note that the maximum outer diameter of a retreaded tyre may be up to 1,5 % greater than the maximum outer diameter of a new, original tyre permitted by Regulation No 54.

| 6.6. | Performance test: |
| --- | --- |

6.6.

Performance test:

| 6.6.1. | Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall be capable of meeting the load/speed endurance test as specified in Annex 7 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.1.

Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall be capable of meeting the load/speed endurance test as specified in Annex 7 to this Regulation.

| 6.6.2. | A retreaded tyre which after undergoing the load/speed endurance test does not exhibit any tread separation, ply separation, cord separation, chunking or broken cords shall be deemed to have passed the test. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2.

A retreaded tyre which after undergoing the load/speed endurance test does not exhibit any tread separation, ply separation, cord separation, chunking or broken cords shall be deemed to have passed the test.

| 6.6.3. | The outer diameter of the tyre, measured six hours after the load/speed endurance test, must not differ by more than ± 3,5 % from the outer diameter as measured before the test. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.

The outer diameter of the tyre, measured six hours after the load/speed endurance test, must not differ by more than ± 3,5 % from the outer diameter as measured before the test.

7.   SPECIFICATIONS

| 7.1. | Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall conform to the following dimensions: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall conform to the following dimensions:

| 7.1.1. | Section width: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1.

Section width:

| 7.1.1.1. | The section width shall be calculated by the following formula:
  S = S1 + K (A - A1)
  where:






  S: | is the actual section width in millimetres as measured on the test rim; |
| --- | --- | --- |
| S1: | is the value of the “Design Section Width”, referred to the measuring rim, as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question; |
| A: | is the width of the test rim in millimetres; |
| A 1: | is the width in millimetres of the measuring rim as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question. |
| K: | is a factor and shall be taken to equal 0,4. |

7.1.1.1.

The section width shall be calculated by the following formula:

S = S1 + K (A - A1)

where:

S:

is the actual section width in millimetres as measured on the test rim;

S1:

is the value of the “Design Section Width”, referred to the measuring rim, as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question;

A:

is the width of the test rim in millimetres;

A 1:

is the width in millimetres of the measuring rim as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question.

K:

is a factor and shall be taken to equal 0,4.

| 7.1.2. | Outer diameter: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.

Outer diameter:

| 7.1.2.1. | The theoretical outer diameter of a retreaded tyre shall be calculated by the following formula:
  D = d + 2H
  where:






  D: | is the theoretical outer diameter in millimetres; |
| --- | --- | --- |
| d: | is the conventional number defined in paragraph 2.21.3 in millimetres; |
| H: | is nominal section height in millimetres and is equal to Sn multiplied by 0,01 Ra |

7.1.2.1.

The theoretical outer diameter of a retreaded tyre shall be calculated by the following formula:

D = d + 2H

where:

D:

is the theoretical outer diameter in millimetres;

d:

is the conventional number defined in paragraph 2.21.3 in millimetres;

H:

is nominal section height in millimetres and is equal to Sn multiplied by 0,01 Ra

where:

| Sn: | is the nominal section width in millimetres; |
| --- | --- |
| Ra: | is the nominal aspect ratio. |

Sn:

is the nominal section width in millimetres;

Ra:

is the nominal aspect ratio.

All of the above symbols are as quoted in the tyre size designation as shown on the sidewall of the tyre in conformity with the requirements of paragraph 3.2.2 and as defined in paragraph 2.21.

| 7.1.2.2. | However, for tyres whose designation is given in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to ECE Regulation No 54, the outer diameter shall be that given in those tables. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.2.

However, for tyres whose designation is given in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to ECE Regulation No 54, the outer diameter shall be that given in those tables.

| 7.1.3. | Method of measuring retreaded tyres: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3.

Method of measuring retreaded tyres:

| 7.1.3.1. | The dimensions of retreaded tyres shall be measured in accordance with the procedures given in Annex 6 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3.1.

The dimensions of retreaded tyres shall be measured in accordance with the procedures given in Annex 6 to this Regulation.

| 7.1.4. | Section width specifications: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.

Section width specifications:

| 7.1.4.1. | The actual overall width may be less than the section width or widths determined in paragraph 7.1. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.1.

The actual overall width may be less than the section width or widths determined in paragraph 7.1.

| 7.1.4.2. | The actual overall width may also exceed the value or values determined in paragraph 7.1 by: | 4 % in the case of radial ply tyres, and |
| --- | --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.

The actual overall width may also exceed the value or values determined in paragraph 7.1 by:

4 % in the case of radial ply tyres, and

| | 8 % in the case of diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres. |
| --- | --- |

8 % in the case of diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres.

However, for tyres with a section width exceeding 305 mm, intended for fitting in dual (twin) formation, the nominal value or values shall not be exceeded by more than:

| | 2 % in the case of radial ply tyres, and |
| --- | --- |

2 % in the case of radial ply tyres, and

| | 4 % for diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres. |
| --- | --- |

4 % for diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres.

| 7.1.5. | Outer diameter specifications: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.

Outer diameter specifications:

| 7.1.5.1. | The actual outer diameter of a retreaded tyre must not be outside the values of Dmin and Dmax obtained by the following formulae:
  Dmin = d + (2H x a)
  Dmax = 1,015 x [d + (2H x b)]
  where: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.

The actual outer diameter of a retreaded tyre must not be outside the values of Dmin and Dmax obtained by the following formulae:

Dmin = d + (2H x a)

Dmax = 1,015 x [d + (2H x b)]

where:

| 7.1.5.1.1. | For sizes not given in the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation, “H” and “d” are as defined in paragraph 7.1.2.1. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.1.

For sizes not given in the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation, “H” and “d” are as defined in paragraph 7.1.2.1.

| 7.1.5.1.2. | for sizes mentioned in paragraph 7.1.2.2 above:
  H = 0,5 (D - d)
  where “D” is the outer diameter and “d” the Nominal rim diameter quoted in the abovementioned tables for the size in question. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.2.

for sizes mentioned in paragraph 7.1.2.2 above:

H = 0,5 (D - d)

where “D” is the outer diameter and “d” the Nominal rim diameter quoted in the abovementioned tables for the size in question.

| 7.1.5.1.3. | The coefficient “a” = 0,97 |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.3.

The coefficient “a” = 0,97

| 7.1.5.1.4. | The coefficient “b” is: | Radial tyres | Diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| for normal use tyres | 1,04 | 1,07 |
| for special use tyres | 1,06 | 1,09 |

7.1.5.1.4.

The coefficient “b” is:

Radial tyres

Diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres

for normal use tyres

1,04

1,07

for special use tyres

1,06

1,09

| 7.1.5.2. | For snow tyres the maximum outer diameter (Dmax) calculated in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may be exceeded by not more than 1 %. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.2.

For snow tyres the maximum outer diameter (Dmax) calculated in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may be exceeded by not more than 1 %.

8.   MODIFICATIONS TO THE APPROVAL

| 8.1. | Every modification concerning a retreading production unit amending any of the information given by the retreading production unit in the Application for Approval, see paragraph 4, shall be notified to the approval authority which approved the retreading production unit. That authority may then either: |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

Every modification concerning a retreading production unit amending any of the information given by the retreading production unit in the Application for Approval, see paragraph 4, shall be notified to the approval authority which approved the retreading production unit. That authority may then either:

| 8.1.1. | Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the retreading production unit still meets the requirements; or |
| --- | --- |

8.1.1.

Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the retreading production unit still meets the requirements; or

| 8.1.2. | Require a further investigation of the approval. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.2.

Require a further investigation of the approval.

| 8.2. | Confirmation of, or refusal of, approval, specifying the modifications, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 5.7 to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

Confirmation of, or refusal of, approval, specifying the modifications, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 5.7 to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation.

9.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 9.1. | The retreading production unit approved according to this Regulation shall conform to the requirements set out in paragraph 6. |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

The retreading production unit approved according to this Regulation shall conform to the requirements set out in paragraph 6.

| 9.2. | The holder of the approval shall ensure that, during each year of production, and spread throughout that year, at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, is checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation: |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

The holder of the approval shall ensure that, during each year of production, and spread throughout that year, at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, is checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation:

| 9.2.1. | 0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than 2 and not necessarily more than 10. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.1.

0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than 2 and not necessarily more than 10.

| 9.3. | If the requirements of paragraph 9.2 are carried out by or under the control of the approval authority, the results may be used as part of, or instead of, those prescribed in paragraph 9.4. |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

If the requirements of paragraph 9.2 are carried out by or under the control of the approval authority, the results may be used as part of, or instead of, those prescribed in paragraph 9.4.

| 9.4. | The authority which has approved the retreading production unit may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. For each production facility, the type approval authority shall take samples at random during each and every production year and at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, shall be checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation: |
| --- | --- |

9.4.

The authority which has approved the retreading production unit may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. For each production facility, the type approval authority shall take samples at random during each and every production year and at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, shall be checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation:

| 9.4.1. | 0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than 2 and not necessarily more than 10. |
| --- | --- |

9.4.1.

0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than 2 and not necessarily more than 10.

| 9.5. | The tests and checks of paragraph 9.4 may replace those required in paragraph 9.2. |
| --- | --- |

9.5.

The tests and checks of paragraph 9.4 may replace those required in paragraph 9.2.

10.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 10.1. | The approval granted in respect of a retreading production unit pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements of paragraph 9 are not complied with or if the retreading production unit or the retreaded tyres produced by that retreading production unit have failed to meet the requirements prescribed in paragraph 9. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

The approval granted in respect of a retreading production unit pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements of paragraph 9 are not complied with or if the retreading production unit or the retreaded tyres produced by that retreading production unit have failed to meet the requirements prescribed in paragraph 9.

| 10.2. | If a Party to the Agreement which applies this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model shown in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

If a Party to the Agreement which applies this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model shown in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

11.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

The authority which granted the approval of the retreading production unit shall be informed if operations and manufacture of retreaded tyres approved within the scope of this Regulation cease. On receipt of this information the authority shall communicate this information to the other Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model shown in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

12.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING APPROVAL TESTS, OF TEST LABORATORIES, AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

| 12.1. | The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and, where applicable, of the approved test laboratories and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued, issued in other countries, are to be sent. |
| --- | --- |

12.1.

The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and, where applicable, of the approved test laboratories and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

| 12.2. | The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation may use laboratories of tyre manufacturers or retreading production units and may designate, as approved test laboratories, those which are situated either in the territory of that Party or in the territory of another Party to the 1958 Agreement subject to a preliminary acceptance of this procedure by the competent administrative department of the latter. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.

The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation may use laboratories of tyre manufacturers or retreading production units and may designate, as approved test laboratories, those which are situated either in the territory of that Party or in the territory of another Party to the 1958 Agreement subject to a preliminary acceptance of this procedure by the competent administrative department of the latter.

| 12.3. | Where a Party to the 1958 Agreement applies paragraph 12.2, it may, if it so desires, be represented at the tests. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.

Where a Party to the 1958 Agreement applies paragraph 12.2, it may, if it so desires, be represented at the tests.

ANNEX 1

COMMUNICATION

(Maximum format: A4 (210 x 297 mm))

Image

ANNEX 2

ARRANGEMENT OF APPROVAL MARK

Image

a = 12 mm (minimum)

The above approval mark affixed to a retreaded tyre shows that the retreading production unit concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) under approval number 109R002439 meeting the requirements of this Regulation in its original form (00).

The approval number must be placed close to the circle and either above or below the “E” or left or right of that letter. The digits of the approval number must be on the same side of the “E” and face in the same direction. The use of Roman numerals as approval numbers should be avoided so as to prevent any confusion with other symbols.

ANNEX 3

ARRANGEMENT OF RETREAD TYRE MARKINGS

Image

b: 6 mm (min.)

c: 4 mm (min.)

d: 3 mm (min.)

and since 1998: 4 mm (min.)

| | MINIMUM HEIGHTS OF MARKINGS (mm) |
| --- | --- |
| | Tyres of
  rim diameter ≤ code 20 or
  ≤ 508 mm
  or of section width
  ≤ 235 mm or ≤ 9" | Tyres of rim diameter
  > code 20 or
  > 508 mm
  or of section width
  > 235 mm or > 9" |
| b | 6 | 9 |
| c | 4 |
| d | 6 |

MINIMUM HEIGHTS OF MARKINGS (mm)

Tyres of

rim diameter ≤ code 20 or

≤ 508 mm

or of section width

≤ 235 mm or ≤ 9"

Tyres of rim diameter

> code 20 or

> 508 mm

or of section width

> 235 mm or > 9"

b

6

9

c

4

d

6

The above example defines a retreaded pneumatic tyre:

Having a nominal section width of 295;

Having a nominal aspect ratio of 80;

Of radial-ply structure (R);

Having a nominal rim diameter of 572 mm, for which the code is 22.5;

Having load capacities of 3 550 kg (single) and 3 150 kg (twinned or dual), corresponding respectively to the load indices 152 and 148 shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation;

Having a nominal speed symbol K (reference speed 110 km/h);

Able to be used at the Unique Point, speed symbol L (reference speed 120 km/h); with a load capacity of 3 350 kg (single) and 3 000 kg (twinned or dual), corresponding respectively to the load indices 150 and 146 shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation;

Intended to be used without an inner tube (TUBELESS) and of Snow type (M+S);

Retreaded in the weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 2003.

Requiring to be inflated to 620 kPa for load/speed endurance tests, for which the PSI symbol is 90.

The positioning and order of the markings constituting the tyre designation shall be as follows:

| (a) | The size designation, comprising the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio, the type-of-structure symbol (where applicable) and the nominal rim diameter, shall be grouped as shown in the above example, that is: 295/80 R 22,5; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

The size designation, comprising the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio, the type-of-structure symbol (where applicable) and the nominal rim diameter, shall be grouped as shown in the above example, that is: 295/80 R 22,5;

| (b) | The service description, comprising the load indices and the speed symbol shall be placed together near the size designation. It may either precede the size designation or follow it or be placed above or below it; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The service description, comprising the load indices and the speed symbol shall be placed together near the size designation. It may either precede the size designation or follow it or be placed above or below it;

| (c) | The symbol “TUBELESS” and “M+S” may be at a distance from the size-designation symbol. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

The symbol “TUBELESS” and “M+S” may be at a distance from the size-designation symbol.

| (d) | The word “RETREAD” may be at a distance from the size-designation symbol. |
| --- | --- |

(d)

The word “RETREAD” may be at a distance from the size-designation symbol.

| (e) | If paragraph 3.2.5 of this Regulation is applied, the additional service description (Unique Point), comprising the load indices and speed symbol, must be shown inside a circle near the nominal service description appearing on the tyre sidewall. |
| --- | --- |

(e)

If paragraph 3.2.5 of this Regulation is applied, the additional service description (Unique Point), comprising the load indices and speed symbol, must be shown inside a circle near the nominal service description appearing on the tyre sidewall.

ANNEX 4

LIST OF LOAD INDICES AND CORRESPONDING LOAD CAPACITIES

| Load index (LI) and load capacity — kg |
| --- |
| LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg |
| 0 | 45 | 40 | 140 | 80 | 450 | 120 | 1 400 | 160 | 4 500 | 200 | 14 000 | 240 | 45 000 |
| 1 | 46,2 | 41 | 145 | 81 | 462 | 121 | 1 450 | 161 | 4 625 | 201 | 14 500 | 241 | 46 250 |
| 2 | 47,5 | 42 | 150 | 82 | 475 | 122 | 1 500 | 162 | 4 750 | 202 | 15 000 | 242 | 47 500 |
| 3 | 48,7 | 43 | 155 | 83 | 487 | 123 | 1 550 | 163 | 4 875 | 203 | 15 500 | 243 | 48 750 |
| 4 | 50 | 44 | 160 | 84 | 500 | 124 | 1 600 | 164 | 5 000 | 204 | 16 000 | 244 | 50 000 |
| 5 | 51,5 | 45 | 165 | 85 | 515 | 125 | 1 650 | 165 | 5 150 | 205 | 16 500 | 245 | 51 500 |
| 6 | 53 | 46 | 170 | 86 | 530 | 126 | 1 700 | 166 | 5 300 | 206 | 17 000 | 246 | 53 000 |
| 7 | 54,5 | 47 | 175 | 87 | 545 | 127 | 1 750 | 167 | 5 450 | 207 | 17 500 | 247 | 54 500 |
| 8 | 56 | 48 | 180 | 88 | 560 | 128 | 1 800 | 168 | 5 600 | 208 | 18 000 | 248 | 56 000 |
| 9 | 58 | 49 | 185 | 89 | 580 | 129 | 1 850 | 169 | 5 800 | 209 | 18 500 | 249 | 58 000 |
| 10 | 60 | 50 | 190 | 90 | 600 | 130 | 1 900 | 170 | 6 000 | 210 | 19 000 | 250 | 60 000 |
| 11 | 61,5 | 51 | 195 | 91 | 615 | 131 | 1 950 | 171 | 6 150 | 211 | 19 500 | 251 | 61 500 |
| 12 | 63 | 52 | 200 | 92 | 630 | 132 | 2 000 | 172 | 6 300 | 212 | 20 000 | 252 | 63 000 |
| 13 | 65 | 53 | 206 | 93 | 650 | 133 | 2 060 | 173 | 6 500 | 213 | 20 600 | 253 | 65 000 |
| 14 | 67 | 54 | 212 | 94 | 670 | 134 | 2 120 | 174 | 6 700 | 214 | 21 200 | 254 | 67 000 |
| 15 | 69 | 55 | 218 | 95 | 690 | 135 | 2 180 | 175 | 6 900 | 215 | 21 800 | 255 | 69 000 |
| 16 | 71 | 56 | 224 | 96 | 710 | 136 | 2 240 | 176 | 7 100 | 216 | 22 400 | 256 | 71 000 |
| 17 | 73 | 57 | 230 | 97 | 730 | 137 | 2 300 | 177 | 7 300 | 217 | 23 000 | 257 | 73 000 |
| 18 | 75 | 58 | 236 | 98 | 750 | 138 | 2 360 | 178 | 7 500 | 218 | 23 600 | 258 | 75 000 |
| 19 | 77,5 | 59 | 243 | 99 | 775 | 139 | 2 430 | 179 | 7 750 | 219 | 24 300 | 259 | 77 500 |
| 20 | 80 | 60 | 250 | 100 | 800 | 140 | 2 500 | 180 | 8 000 | 220 | 25 000 | 260 | 80 000 |
| 21 | 82,5 | 61 | 257 | 101 | 825 | 141 | 2 575 | 181 | 8 250 | 221 | 25 750 | 261 | 82 500 |
| 22 | 85 | 62 | 265 | 102 | 850 | 142 | 2 650 | 182 | 8 500 | 222 | 26 500 | 262 | 85 000 |
| 23 | 87,5 | 63 | 272 | 103 | 875 | 143 | 2 725 | 183 | 8 750 | 223 | 27 250 | 263 | 87 500 |
| 24 | 90 | 64 | 280 | 104 | 900 | 144 | 2 800 | 184 | 9 000 | 224 | 28 000 | 264 | 90 000 |
| 25 | 92,5 | 65 | 290 | 105 | 925 | 145 | 2 900 | 185 | 9 250 | 225 | 29 000 | 265 | 92 500 |
| 26 | 95 | 66 | 300 | 106 | 950 | 146 | 3 000 | 186 | 9 500 | 226 | 30 000 | 266 | 95 000 |
| 27 | 97,5 | 67 | 307 | 107 | 975 | 147 | 3 075 | 187 | 9 750 | 227 | 30 750 | 267 | 97 500 |
| 28 | 100 | 68 | 315 | 108 | 1 000 | 148 | 3 150 | 188 | 10 000 | 228 | 31 500 | 268 | 100 000 |
| 29 | 103 | 69 | 325 | 109 | 1 030 | 149 | 3 250 | 189 | 10 300 | 229 | 32 500 | 269 | 103 000 |
| 30 | 106 | 70 | 335 | 110 | 1 060 | 150 | 3 350 | 190 | 10 600 | 230 | 33 500 | 270 | 106 000 |
| 31 | 109 | 71 | 345 | 111 | 1 090 | 151 | 3 450 | 191 | 10 900 | 231 | 34 500 | 271 | 109 000 |
| 32 | 112 | 72 | 355 | 112 | 1 120 | 152 | 3 550 | 192 | 11 200 | 232 | 35 500 | 272 | 112 000 |
| 33 | 115 | 73 | 365 | 113 | 1 150 | 153 | 3 650 | 193 | 11 500 | 233 | 36 500 | 273 | 115 000 |
| 34 | 118 | 74 | 375 | 114 | 1 180 | 154 | 3 750 | 194 | 11 800 | 234 | 37 500 | 274 | 118 000 |
| 35 | 121 | 75 | 387 | 115 | 1 215 | 155 | 3 875 | 195 | 12 150 | 235 | 38 750 | 275 | 121 500 |
| 36 | 125 | 76 | 400 | 116 | 1 250 | 156 | 4 000 | 196 | 12 500 | 236 | 40 000 | 276 | 125 000 |
| 37 | 128 | 77 | 412 | 117 | 1 285 | 157 | 4 125 | 197 | 12 850 | 237 | 41 250 | 277 | 128 500 |
| 38 | 132 | 78 | 425 | 118 | 1 320 | 158 | 4 250 | 198 | 13 200 | 238 | 42 500 | 278 | 132 000 |
| 39 | 136 | 79 | 437 | 119 | 1 360 | 159 | 4 375 | 199 | 13 600 | 239 | 43 750 | 279 | 136 000 |

Load index (LI) and load capacity — kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

0

45

40

140

80

450

120

1 400

160

4 500

200

14 000

240

45 000

1

46,2

41

145

81

462

121

1 450

161

4 625

201

14 500

241

46 250

2

47,5

42

150

82

475

122

1 500

162

4 750

202

15 000

242

47 500

3

48,7

43

155

83

487

123

1 550

163

4 875

203

15 500

243

48 750

4

50

44

160

84

500

124

1 600

164

5 000

204

16 000

244

50 000

5

51,5

45

165

85

515

125

1 650

165

5 150

205

16 500

245

51 500

6

53

46

170

86

530

126

1 700

166

5 300

206

17 000

246

53 000

7

54,5

47

175

87

545

127

1 750

167

5 450

207

17 500

247

54 500

8

56

48

180

88

560

128

1 800

168

5 600

208

18 000

248

56 000

9

58

49

185

89

580

129

1 850

169

5 800

209

18 500

249

58 000

10

60

50

190

90

600

130

1 900

170

6 000

210

19 000

250

60 000

11

61,5

51

195

91

615

131

1 950

171

6 150

211

19 500

251

61 500

12

63

52

200

92

630

132

2 000

172

6 300

212

20 000

252

63 000

13

65

53

206

93

650

133

2 060

173

6 500

213

20 600

253

65 000

14

67

54

212

94

670

134

2 120

174

6 700

214

21 200

254

67 000

15

69

55

218

95

690

135

2 180

175

6 900

215

21 800

255

69 000

16

71

56

224

96

710

136

2 240

176

7 100

216

22 400

256

71 000

17

73

57

230

97

730

137

2 300

177

7 300

217

23 000

257

73 000

18

75

58

236

98

750

138

2 360

178

7 500

218

23 600

258

75 000

19

77,5

59

243

99

775

139

2 430

179

7 750

219

24 300

259

77 500

20

80

60

250

100

800

140

2 500

180

8 000

220

25 000

260

80 000

21

82,5

61

257

101

825

141

2 575

181

8 250

221

25 750

261

82 500

22

85

62

265

102

850

142

2 650

182

8 500

222

26 500

262

85 000

23

87,5

63

272

103

875

143

2 725

183

8 750

223

27 250

263

87 500

24

90

64

280

104

900

144

2 800

184

9 000

224

28 000

264

90 000

25

92,5

65

290

105

925

145

2 900

185

9 250

225

29 000

265

92 500

26

95

66

300

106

950

146

3 000

186

9 500

226

30 000

266

95 000

27

97,5

67

307

107

975

147

3 075

187

9 750

227

30 750

267

97 500

28

100

68

315

108

1 000

148

3 150

188

10 000

228

31 500

268

100 000

29

103

69

325

109

1 030

149

3 250

189

10 300

229

32 500

269

103 000

30

106

70

335

110

1 060

150

3 350

190

10 600

230

33 500

270

106 000

31

109

71

345

111

1 090

151

3 450

191

10 900

231

34 500

271

109 000

32

112

72

355

112

1 120

152

3 550

192

11 200

232

35 500

272

112 000

33

115

73

365

113

1 150

153

3 650

193

11 500

233

36 500

273

115 000

34

118

74

375

114

1 180

154

3 750

194

11 800

234

37 500

274

118 000

35

121

75

387

115

1 215

155

3 875

195

12 150

235

38 750

275

121 500

36

125

76

400

116

1 250

156

4 000

196

12 500

236

40 000

276

125 000

37

128

77

412

117

1 285

157

4 125

197

12 850

237

41 250

277

128 500

38

132

78

425

118

1 320

158

4 250

198

13 200

238

42 500

278

132 000

39

136

79

437

119

1 360

159

4 375

199

13 600

239

43 750

279

136 000

ANNEX 5

TYRE SIZE DESIGNATION AND DIMENSIONS (IN ACCORDANCE WITH ECE REGULATION NO 54)

For this information refer to Annex 5 of ECE Regulation No 54

Note that with reference to paragraph 6.5.4 of this Regulation, the outer diameter of a retreaded tyre may in all cases be greater than that shown in the tables in Annex 5 to Regulation No 54 but by no more than 1,5 %.

ANNEX 6

METHOD OF MEASURING PNEUMATIC TYRES

| 1. | The tyre shall be mounted on the test rim specified by the retreader and inflated to the nominal inflation pressure quoted in the nominated International Tyre Standard (see paragraph 4.1.4.7 of this Regulation) in relation to the maximum load carrying capacity for that size and load index. |
| --- | --- |

1.

The tyre shall be mounted on the test rim specified by the retreader and inflated to the nominal inflation pressure quoted in the nominated International Tyre Standard (see paragraph 4.1.4.7 of this Regulation) in relation to the maximum load carrying capacity for that size and load index.

| 2. | The tyre, fitted to the appropriate rim, shall be conditioned to the ambient temperature of the laboratory for at least 24 hours save as otherwise required by paragraph 6.6.3 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.

The tyre, fitted to the appropriate rim, shall be conditioned to the ambient temperature of the laboratory for at least 24 hours save as otherwise required by paragraph 6.6.3 of this Regulation.

| 3. | The pressure shall be re-adjusted to the value in paragraph 1 of this Annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.

The pressure shall be re-adjusted to the value in paragraph 1 of this Annex.

| 4. | The overall width shall be measured at six equally spaced points around the tyre, taking account of the thickness of any protective ribs or bands. The highest reading obtained shall be taken as the overall width. |
| --- | --- |

4.

The overall width shall be measured at six equally spaced points around the tyre, taking account of the thickness of any protective ribs or bands. The highest reading obtained shall be taken as the overall width.

| 5. | The outer diameter shall be calculated from a measurement of the maximum circumference of the inflated tyre. |
| --- | --- |

5.

The outer diameter shall be calculated from a measurement of the maximum circumference of the inflated tyre.

ANNEX 7

PROCEDURE FOR LOAD/SPEED ENDURANCE TESTS

(in principle in accordance with Regulation No 54)

| 1. | Preparing the tyre |
| --- | --- |

1.

Preparing the tyre

| 1.1. | Mount a retreaded tyre on the test rim specified by the retreader. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Mount a retreaded tyre on the test rim specified by the retreader.

| 1.2. | Use a new inner tube or combination of inner tube, valve and flap (as required) when testing tyres with inner tubes. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

Use a new inner tube or combination of inner tube, valve and flap (as required) when testing tyres with inner tubes.

| 1.3. | Inflate the tyre to the pressure corresponding to the pressure index as specified in paragraph 3.2.10 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

Inflate the tyre to the pressure corresponding to the pressure index as specified in paragraph 3.2.10 of this Regulation.

| 1.4. | Condition the tyre and wheel assembly at test-room temperature for not less than 3 hours. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Condition the tyre and wheel assembly at test-room temperature for not less than 3 hours.

| 1.5. | Readjust the tyre pressure to that specified in paragraph 1.3 of this Annex. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Readjust the tyre pressure to that specified in paragraph 1.3 of this Annex.

| 2. | Test procedure |
| --- | --- |

2.

Test procedure

| 2.1. | Mount the tyre and wheel assembly on the test axle and press it against the outer face of a smooth surfaced power-driven test drum 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter having a surface at least as wide as the tyre tread. In certain cases a 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter drum may be used. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

Mount the tyre and wheel assembly on the test axle and press it against the outer face of a smooth surfaced power-driven test drum 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter having a surface at least as wide as the tyre tread. In certain cases a 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter drum may be used.

| 2.2. | Apply to the test axle a series of test loads equal to a percentage of the load indicated in Annex 4 to this Regulation, corresponding to the load index indicated on the tyre, and in accordance with the test programme below. Where the tyre has load capacity indices for operation in both single and twin or dual formation the load corresponding to the load index for single operation shall be used for the test. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

Apply to the test axle a series of test loads equal to a percentage of the load indicated in Annex 4 to this Regulation, corresponding to the load index indicated on the tyre, and in accordance with the test programme below. Where the tyre has load capacity indices for operation in both single and twin or dual formation the load corresponding to the load index for single operation shall be used for the test.

| 2.2.1. | In the case of a tyre with a load index ≤ 121 and a speed symbol ≥ Q (160 km/h), the test procedure shall be as specified in paragraph 3 of this Annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

In the case of a tyre with a load index ≤ 121 and a speed symbol ≥ Q (160 km/h), the test procedure shall be as specified in paragraph 3 of this Annex.

| 2.2.2. | For all other tyres the test procedure is as shown in Appendix 1 to this Annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

For all other tyres the test procedure is as shown in Appendix 1 to this Annex.

| 2.3. | Endurance test programme — See also Appendix 1 to this Annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

Endurance test programme — See also Appendix 1 to this Annex.

| 2.3.1. | The tyre pressure shall not be corrected throughout the test and the test load shall be kept constant throughout each of the three test stages. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1.

The tyre pressure shall not be corrected throughout the test and the test load shall be kept constant throughout each of the three test stages.

| 2.3.2. | During the test the temperature of the test room shall be maintained at between 20 oC and 30 oC unless the tyre manufacturer or retreader agrees to the use of a higher temperature. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2.

During the test the temperature of the test room shall be maintained at between 20 oC and 30 oC unless the tyre manufacturer or retreader agrees to the use of a higher temperature.

| 2.4. | The endurance test programme shall be carried out without interruption. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

The endurance test programme shall be carried out without interruption.

| 3. | Load/speed test procedure for tyres with a load index ≤ 121 and a speed symbol ≥ Q (160 km/h): |
| --- | --- |

3.

Load/speed test procedure for tyres with a load index ≤ 121 and a speed symbol ≥ Q (160 km/h):

| 3.1. | The load on the wheel and tyre shall be the following percentage of that corresponding to the load index of the tyre: |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

The load on the wheel and tyre shall be the following percentage of that corresponding to the load index of the tyre:

| 3.1.1. | 90 % when tested on a drum of 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1.

90 % when tested on a drum of 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter;

| 3.1.2. | 92 % when tested on a drum of 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

92 % when tested on a drum of 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter.

| 3.2. | The initial phase test speed shall be 20 km/h less than that indicated by the speed symbol for the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

The initial phase test speed shall be 20 km/h less than that indicated by the speed symbol for the tyre.

| 3.2.1. | Time taken to reach initial test speed shall be 10 minutes. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

Time taken to reach initial test speed shall be 10 minutes.

| 3.2.2. | The duration of the first phase shall be 10 minutes. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

The duration of the first phase shall be 10 minutes.

| 3.3. | The second phase test speed shall be 10 km/h less than that indicated by the speed symbol for the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

The second phase test speed shall be 10 km/h less than that indicated by the speed symbol for the tyre.

| 3.3.1. | The duration of the second phase shall be 10 minutes. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.1.

The duration of the second phase shall be 10 minutes.

| 3.4. | The final phase test speed shall be the speed corresponding to that indicated by the speed symbol for the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

The final phase test speed shall be the speed corresponding to that indicated by the speed symbol for the tyre.

| 3.4.1. | The duration of the final phase shall be 30 minutes. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1.

The duration of the final phase shall be 30 minutes.

| 3.5. | The duration of the entire test shall be 1 hour. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.

The duration of the entire test shall be 1 hour.

| 4. | Equivalent test method:
  If a test method other than that given in paragraphs 2 or 3 of this Annex is used, its equivalence must be demonstrated. |
| --- | --- |

4.

Equivalent test method:

If a test method other than that given in paragraphs 2 or 3 of this Annex is used, its equivalence must be demonstrated.

ANNEX 7

APPENDIX 1

ENDURANCE-TEST PROGRAMME

| Load index | Speed symbol | Test-drum speed (minimum-1) | Load placed on the wheel as a percentage of the load corresponding to the load index |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Radial-ply | Diagonal (bias ply) and bias belted | 7 hours | 16 hours | 24 hours |
| 122 or more | F | 100 | 100 | | | |
| G | 125 | 100 |
| J | 150 | 125 | | | |
| K | 175 | 150 | | | |
| L | 200 | — | | | |
| M | 225 | — | 66 % | 84 % | 101 % |
| 121 or less | F | 100 | 100 | | | |
| G | 125 | 125 | | | |
| J | 150 | 150 | | | |
| K | 175 | 175 | | | |
| L | 200 | 175 | 70 % | 88 % | 106 % |
| | | | 4 h. | 6 h. | |
| M | 250 | 200 | 75 % | 97 % | 114 % |
| N | 275 | — | 75 % | 97 % | 114 % |
| P | 300 | — | 75 % | 97 % | 114 % |
| Notes:

  “Special-use” tyres (see paragraph 2.3.2 of this Regulation) shall be tested at a speed equal to 85 % of the speed prescribed for equivalent normal tyres. |

Load index

Speed symbol

Test-drum speed (minimum-1)

Load placed on the wheel as a percentage of the load corresponding to the load index

Radial-ply

Diagonal (bias ply) and bias belted

7 hours

16 hours

24 hours

122 or more

F

100

100

G

125

100

J

150

125

K

175

150

L

200

—

M

225

—

66 %

84 %

101 %

121 or less

F

100

100

G

125

125

J

150

150

K

175

175

L

200

175

70 %

88 %

106 %

4 h.

6 h.

M

250

200

75 %

97 %

114 %

N

275

—

75 %

97 %

114 %

P

300

—

75 %

97 %

114 %

Notes:

“Special-use” tyres (see paragraph 2.3.2 of this Regulation) shall be tested at a speed equal to 85 % of the speed prescribed for equivalent normal tyres.

ANNEX 7

Appendix 2

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE PRESSURE INDEX AND UNITS OF PRESSURE

| Pressure index
  (PSI) | bar | kPa |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 20 | 1,4 | 140 |
| 25 | 1,7 | 170 |
| 30 | 2,1 | 210 |
| 35 | 2,4 | 240 |
| 40 | 2,8 | 280 |
| 45 | 3,1 | 310 |
| 50 | 3,4 | 340 |
| 55 | 3,8 | 380 |
| 60 | 4,1 | 410 |
| 65 | 4,5 | 450 |
| 70 | 4,8 | 480 |
| 75 | 5,2 | 520 |
| 80 | 5,5 | 550 |
| 85 | 5,9 | 590 |
| 90 | 6,2 | 620 |
| 95 | 6,6 | 660 |
| 100 | 6,9 | 690 |
| 105 | 7,2 | 720 |
| 110 | 7,6 | 760 |
| 115 | 7,9 | 790 |
| 120 | 8,3 | 830 |
| 125 | 8,6 | 860 |
| 130 | 9,0 | 900 |
| 135 | 9,3 | 930 |
| 140 | 9,7 | 970 |
| 145 | 10,0 | 1 000 |
| 150 | 10,3 | 1 030 |
| ... | ... | ... |

Pressure index

(PSI)

bar

kPa

20

1,4

140

25

1,7

170

30

2,1

210

35

2,4

240

40

2,8

280

45

3,1

310

50

3,4

340

55

3,8

380

60

4,1

410

65

4,5

450

70

4,8

480

75

5,2

520

80

5,5

550

85

5,9

590

90

6,2

620

95

6,6

660

100

6,9

690

105

7,2

720

110

7,6

760

115

7,9

790

120

8,3

830

125

8,6

860

130

9,0

900

135

9,3

930

140

9,7

970

145

10,0

1 000

150

10,3

1 030

...

...

...

ANNEX 8

VARIATION OF LOAD CAPACITY WITH SPEED: COMMERCIAL VEHICLE TYRES RADIAL AND DIAGONAL PLY

(in accordance with UN/ECE Regulation No 54)

| Variation of load capacity (%) |
| --- |
| Speed
  (km/h) | All load indices | Load indices
  ≥ 122 (9) | Load indices
  ≤ 121 (9) |
| Speed symbol | Speed symbol | Speed symbol |
| | F | G | J | K | L | M | L | M | N | P (10) |
| 0 | + 150 | + 150 | + 150 | + 150 | + 150 | + 150 | + 110 | + 110 | + 110 | + 110 |
| 5 | + 110 | + 110 | + 110 | + 110 | + 110 | + 110 | + 90 | + 90 | + 90 | + 90 |
| 10 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 75 | + 75 | + 75 | + 75 |
| 15 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 60 | + 60 | + 60 | + 60 |
| 20 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 |
| 25 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 42 | + 42 | + 42 | + 42 |
| 30 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 |
| 35 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 29 | + 29 | + 29 | + 29 |
| 40 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 |
| 45 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 22 | + 22 | + 22 | + 22 |
| 50 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 20 | + 20 | + 20 | + 20 |
| 55 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | +17,5 | +17,5 | +17,5 | +17,5 |
| 60 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | +15,0 | +15,0 | +15,0 | +15,0 |
| 65 | +7,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +13,5 | +13,5 | +13,5 | +13,5 |
| 70 | +5,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +12,5 | +12,5 | +12,5 | +12,5 |
| 75 | +2,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +11,0 | +11,0 | +11,0 | +11,0 |
| 80 | 0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +10,0 | +10,0 | +10,0 | +10,0 |
| 85 | – 3 | +2,0 | +3,0 | +3,0 | +3,0 | +3,0 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 |
| 90 | – 6 | 0 | +2,0 | +2,0 | +2,0 | +2,0 | +7,5 | +7,5 | +7,5 | +7,5 |
| 95 | – 10 | –2,5 | +1,0 | +1,0 | +1,0 | +1,0 | +6,5 | +6,5 | +6,5 | +6,5 |
| 100 | – 15 | – 5 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | +5,0 | +5,0 | +5,0 | +5,0 |
| 105 | | – 8 | – 2 | 0 | 0 | 0 | +3,75 | +3,75 | +3,75 | +3,75 |
| 110 | | – 13 | – 4 | 0 | 0 | 0 | +2,5 | +2,5 | +2,5 | +2,5 |
| 115 | | | – 7 | – 3 | 0 | 0 | +1,25 | +1,25 | +1,25 | +1,25 |
| 120 | | | – 12 | – 7 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| 125 | | | | | | 0 | –2,5 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| 130 | | | | | | 0 | –5,0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| 135 | | | | | | | –7,5 | –2,5 | 0 | 0 |
| 140 | | | | | | | – 10 | – 5 | 0 | 0 |
| 145 | | | | | | | | –7,5 | –2,5 | 0 |
| 150 | | | | | | | | –10,0 | –5,0 | 0 |
| 155 | | | | | | | | | –7,5 | –2,5 |
| 160 | | | | | | | | | –10,0 | –5,0 |

Variation of load capacity (%)

Speed

(km/h)

All load indices

Load indices

≥ 122 (9)

Load indices

≤ 121 (9)

Speed symbol

Speed symbol

Speed symbol

F

G

J

K

L

M

L

M

N

P (10)

0

- 150

- 150

- 150

- 150

- 150

- 150

- 110

- 110

- 110

- 110

5

- 110

- 110

- 110

- 110

- 110

- 110

- 90

- 90

- 90

- 90

10

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 75

- 75

- 75

- 75

15

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 60

- 60

- 60

- 60

20

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

25

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 42

- 42

- 42

- 42

30

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

35

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 29

- 29

- 29

- 29

40

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

45

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 22

- 22

- 22

- 22

50

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 20

- 20

- 20

- 20

55

- 11

- 11

- 11

- 11

- 11

- 11

+17,5

+17,5

+17,5

+17,5

60

- 10

- 10

- 10

- 10

- 10

- 10

+15,0

+15,0

+15,0

+15,0

65

+7,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+13,5

+13,5

+13,5

+13,5

70

+5,0

+7,0

+7,0

+7,0

+7,0

+7,0

+12,5

+12,5

+12,5

+12,5

75

+2,5

+5,5

+5,5

+5,5

+5,5

+5,5

+11,0

+11,0

+11,0

+11,0

80

0

+4,0

+4,0

+4,0

+4,0

+4,0

+10,0

+10,0

+10,0

+10,0

85

– 3

+2,0

+3,0

+3,0

+3,0

+3,0

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

90

– 6

0

+2,0

+2,0

+2,0

+2,0

+7,5

+7,5

+7,5

+7,5

95

– 10

–2,5

+1,0

+1,0

+1,0

+1,0

+6,5

+6,5

+6,5

+6,5

100

– 15

– 5

0

0

0

0

+5,0

+5,0

+5,0

+5,0

105

– 8

– 2

0

0

0

+3,75

+3,75

+3,75

+3,75

110

– 13

– 4

0

0

0

+2,5

+2,5

+2,5

+2,5

115

– 7

– 3

0

0

+1,25

+1,25

+1,25

+1,25

120

– 12

– 7

0

0

0

0

0

0

125

0

–2,5

0

0

0

130

0

–5,0

0

0

0

135

–7,5

–2,5

0

0

140

– 10

– 5

0

0

145

–7,5

–2,5

0

150

–10,0

–5,0

0

155

–7,5

–2,5

160

–10,0

–5,0

ANNEX 9

EXPLANATORY FIGURE

See paragraph 2 of this Regulation

Image

---

(1)  ETRTO, 32 Av. Brugmann — Bte 2, B-1060 Brussels, Belgium

1

(2)  TRA, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio, 44321 USA

2

(3)  JATMA, 9th Floor, Toranomon Building No 1-12, 1-Chome Toranomon Minato‐ku, Tokyo 105, Japan

3

(4)  TRAA, Suite 1, Hawthorn House, 795 Glenferrie Road, Hawthorn, Victoria, 3122 Australia

4

(5)  ABPA, Avenida Paulista 244-12o Andar, CEP, 01310 Sao Paulo, SP Brazil

5

o

(6)  STRO, Älggatan 48 A, Nb, S-216 15 Malmö, Sweden

6

(7)  This marking shall only be mandatory for tyre types manufactured to this Regulation after the entry into force of Supplement 1 to the Regulation.

7

(8)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Yugoslavia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35 (vacant), 36 for Lithuania, 37 for Turkey, 38 (vacant), 39 for Azerbaijan, 40 for The Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia, 46 for Ukraine, 47 for South Africa and 48 for New Zealand. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned to other countries in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

8

(9)  The load indices refer to operation in single formation.

9

(10)  Load variations are not allowed for speeds above 160 km/h. For speed symbols “Q” and above the speed corresponding to the speed symbol specifies the maximum permissible speed for the tyre.

10

---

ANNEX II

Regulation No 108

UNIFORM PROVISIONS CONCERNING THE APPROVAL FOR THE PRODUCTION OF RETREADED PNEUMATIC TYRES FOR MOTOR VEHICLES AND THEIR TRAILERS

(Consolidated text)

CONTENTS

REGULATION

| 1. | Scope |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Markings |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Requirements |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Specifications |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Modifications to the approval |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Production definitely discontinued |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Names and addresses of technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, of test laboratories, and of administrative departments |
| --- | --- |

12.

ANNEXES

| Annex 1 | Communication concerning the approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a retreading production unit pursuant to Regulation No 108 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1

| Annex 2 | Arrangement of approval marks |
| --- | --- |

Annex 2

| Annex 3 | Arrangement of retread tyre markings |
| --- | --- |

Annex 3

| Annex 4 | List of load indices and corresponding load capacities |
| --- | --- |

Annex 4

| Annex 5 | Tyre size designation and dimensions |
| --- | --- |

Annex 5

| Annex 6 | Method of measuring pneumatic tyres |
| --- | --- |

Annex 6

| Annex 7 | Procedure for load/speed endurance tests |
| --- | --- |

Annex 7

| Annex 8 | Explanatory figure |
| --- | --- |

Annex 8

1.   SCOPE

This Regulation applies to the production of retreaded tyres intended to be fitted to private (passenger) cars and their trailers used on the road. It does not however apply to:

| 1.1. | Retreaded tyres for commercial vehicles and their trailers. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Retreaded tyres for commercial vehicles and their trailers.

| 1.2. | Retreaded tyres with a speed capability below 120 km/h or above 300 km/h. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

Retreaded tyres with a speed capability below 120 km/h or above 300 km/h.

| 1.3. | Tyres for cycles and motorcycles. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

Tyres for cycles and motorcycles.

| 1.4. | Tyres originally produced without speed symbols and load indices. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Tyres originally produced without speed symbols and load indices.

| 1.5. | Tyres originally produced without type approval and without either an “E” or “e” mark. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Tyres originally produced without type approval and without either an “E” or “e” mark.

| 1.6. | Tyres designed for the equipment of cars produced prior to 1939. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.

Tyres designed for the equipment of cars produced prior to 1939.

| 1.7. | Tyres designed exclusively for competition or off road use and marked accordingly. |
| --- | --- |

1.7.

Tyres designed exclusively for competition or off road use and marked accordingly.

| 1.8. | Tyres designated as “T type” temporary use spares. |
| --- | --- |

1.8.

Tyres designated as “T type” temporary use spares.

2.   DEFINITIONS — See also figure in Annex 8

For the purpose of this Regulation:

| 2.1. | “Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres” — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

“Range of retreaded pneumatic tyres” — means a range of retreaded pneumatic tyres as quoted in paragraph 4.1.4.

| 2.2. | “Structure” of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular: |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

“Structure” of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:

| 2.2.1. | “Diagonal” or “bias ply” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

“Diagonal” or “bias ply” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.

| 2.2.2. | “Bias belted” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

“Bias belted” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.

| 2.2.3. | “Radial” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.

“Radial” describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.

| 2.3. | “Category of use” |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

“Category of use”

| 2.3.1. | Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1.

Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.

| 2.3.2. | Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2.

Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.

| 2.3.3. | Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.3.

Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.

| 2.3.4. | “T” type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.4.

“T” type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.

| 2.4. | “Bead” means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

“Bead” means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.

| 2.5. | “Cord” means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

“Cord” means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre.

| 2.6. | “Ply” means a layer of “rubber” coated parallel cords. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

“Ply” means a layer of “rubber” coated parallel cords.

| 2.7. | “Belt” applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

“Belt” applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction.

| 2.8. | “Breaker” applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

“Breaker” applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread.

| 2.9. | “Chafer” means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

“Chafer” means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim.

| 2.10. | “Carcass” means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost “rubber” of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

“Carcass” means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost “rubber” of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load.

| 2.11. | “Tread” means that part of a pneumatic-tyre which is designed to come into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

“Tread” means that part of a pneumatic-tyre which is designed to come into contact with the ground, protects the carcass against mechanical damage and contributes to ground adhesion.

| 2.12. | “Sidewall” means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange. |
| --- | --- |

2.12.

“Sidewall” means the part of a pneumatic tyre between the tread and the area designed to be covered by the rim flange.

| 2.13. | “Lower area of tyre” means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim. |
| --- | --- |

2.13.

“Lower area of tyre” means the area included between the line of maximum section width of the tyre and the area designed to be covered by the edge of the rim.

| 2.14. | “Tread groove” means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.

“Tread groove” means the space between the adjacent ribs or blocks in the tread pattern.

| 2.15. | “Principal grooves” means the wide grooves situated in the central zone of the tread, which cover approximately three-quarters of the breadth of the tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.15.

“Principal grooves” means the wide grooves situated in the central zone of the tread, which cover approximately three-quarters of the breadth of the tread.

| 2.16. | “Section width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs. |
| --- | --- |

2.16.

“Section width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, but excluding elevations due to labelling (marking), decoration or protective bands or ribs.

| 2.17. | “Overall width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including |
| --- | --- |

2.17.

“Overall width” means the linear distance between the outside of the sidewalls of an inflated pneumatic-tyre, when fitted to the specified measuring rim, and including

| 2.18. | “Section height” means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter. |
| --- | --- |

2.18.

“Section height” means a distance equal to half the difference between the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal rim diameter.

| 2.19. | “Nominal aspect ratio” means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units. |
| --- | --- |

2.19.

“Nominal aspect ratio” means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.

| 2.20. | “Outer diameter” means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.20.

“Outer diameter” means the overall diameter of an inflated, newly retreaded tyre.

| 2.21. | “Tyre size designation” means a designation showing: |
| --- | --- |

2.21.

“Tyre size designation” means a designation showing:

| 2.21.1. | The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.1.

The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.

| 2.21.2. | The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.2.

The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.

| 2.21.3. | A conventional number “d” (the “d” symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.3.

A conventional number “d” (the “d” symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.

| 2.21.3.1. | The values of the “d” symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below:






  Nominal rim diameter code (d) | Value of the “d” symbol expressed in mm |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 8
  9
  10
  11
  12
  13
  14 | 203
  229
  254
  279
  305
  330
  356 |
| 15
  16
  17
  18
  19 | 381
  406
  432
  457
  483 |
| 20
  21 | 508
  533 |

2.21.3.1.

The values of the “d” symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below:

Nominal rim diameter code (d)

Value of the “d” symbol expressed in mm

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

203

229

254

279

305

330

356

15

16

17

18

19

381

406

432

457

483

20

21

508

533

| 2.22. | “Nominal rim diameter (d)” means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted. |
| --- | --- |

2.22.

“Nominal rim diameter (d)” means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.

| 2.23. | “Rim” means the support, either for a tyre-and-tube assembly or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated. |
| --- | --- |

2.23.

“Rim” means the support, either for a tyre-and-tube assembly or for a tubeless tyre, on which the tyre beads are seated.

| 2.24. | “Measuring rim” means the rim specified as a “measuring rim width” or “design rim width” for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards. |
| --- | --- |

2.24.

“Measuring rim” means the rim specified as a “measuring rim width” or “design rim width” for a particular tyre size designation in any edition of one or more of the International Tyre Standards.

| 2.25. | “Test rim” means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type. |
| --- | --- |

2.25.

“Test rim” means any rim specified as approved or recommended or permitted in one of the International Tyre Standards for a tyre of that size designation and type.

| 2.26. | “International Tyre Standard” means any one of the following standard documents:






  (a) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1)
   (2): “Standards Manual”; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.26.

“International Tyre Standard” means any one of the following standard documents:

(a)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (1)
   (2): “Standards Manual”;

| (b) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (2): “Engineering Design Information — obsolete data”; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (2): “Engineering Design Information — obsolete data”;

| (c) | The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (3): “Year Book”; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (3): “Year Book”;

| (d) | The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (4): “Year Book”; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (4): “Year Book”;

| (e) | The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (5): “Standards Manual”; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (5): “Standards Manual”;

| (f) | The Associaçiao Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) (6): “Manual de Normal Technicas”; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

The Associaçiao Latino Americana de Pneus e Aros (ALAPA) (6): “Manual de Normal Technicas”;

| (g) | The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (7): “Data Book”. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (7): “Data Book”.

| 2.27. | “Chunking” means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.27.

“Chunking” means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.

| 2.28. | “Cord separation” means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating. |
| --- | --- |

2.28.

“Cord separation” means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.

| 2.29. | “Ply separation” means the parting of adjacent plies. |
| --- | --- |

2.29.

“Ply separation” means the parting of adjacent plies.

| 2.30. | “Tread separation” means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass. |
| --- | --- |

2.30.

“Tread separation” means the pulling away of the tread from the carcass.

| 2.31. | “Tread wear indicators” means the projections within the tread grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degree of wear of the tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.31.

“Tread wear indicators” means the projections within the tread grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degree of wear of the tread.

| 2.32. | “Service description” means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.32.

“Service description” means the specific combination of the load index and speed symbol of the tyre.

| 2.33. | “Load index” means a numerical code which indicates the maximum load the tyre can support.
  The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.33.

“Load index” means a numerical code which indicates the maximum load the tyre can support.

The list of load indices and the corresponding loads are shown in Annex 4 to this Regulation.

| 2.34. | “Speed symbol” means: |
| --- | --- |

2.34.

“Speed symbol” means:

| 2.34.1. | An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load index. |
| --- | --- |

2.34.1.

An alphabetical symbol indicating the speed at which the tyre can carry the load given by the associated load index.

| 2.34.2. | The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below:






  Speed symbol | Corresponding speed (km/h) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| L
  M
  N
  P
  Q
  R
  S
  T
  U
  H
  V
  W
  Y | 120
  130
  140
  150
  160
  170
  180
  190
  200
  210
  240
  270
  300 |

2.34.2.

The speed symbols and corresponding speeds are as shown in the table below:

Speed symbol

Corresponding speed (km/h)

L

M

N

P

Q

R

S

T

U

H

V

W

Y

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

240

270

300

| 2.35. | “Maximum load rating” means the maximum mass which the tyre is rated to support. |
| --- | --- |

2.35.

“Maximum load rating” means the maximum mass which the tyre is rated to support.

| 2.35.1. | For speeds not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the value corresponding to the load index for the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.35.1.

For speeds not exceeding 210 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the value corresponding to the load index for the tyre.

| 2.35.2. | For speeds greater than 210 km/h but not exceeding 300 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, given in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted:







  Tyre speed symbol | Maximum speed (km/h) | Maximum load rating ( %) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| V | 210
  215
  220
  225
  230
  235
  240 | 100,0
  98,5
  97,0
  95,5
  94,0
  92,5
  91,0 |
| W | 240
  250
  260
  270 | 100
  95
  90
  85 |
| Y | 270
  280
  290
  300 | 100
  95
  90
  85 |

2.35.2.

For speeds greater than 210 km/h but not exceeding 300 km/h, the maximum load rating shall not exceed the percentage of the value associated with the load capacity index of the tyre, given in the table below, with reference to the speed capability of the vehicle to which the tyre is to be fitted:

Tyre speed symbol

Maximum speed (km/h)

Maximum load rating ( %)

V

210

215

220

225

230

235

240

100,0

98,5

97,0

95,5

94,0

92,5

91,0

W

240

250

260

270

100

95

90

85

Y

270

280

290

300

100

95

90

85

For intermediate maximum speeds a linear interpolation of the maximum load rating is permissible.

| 2.36. | “Retreading production unit” means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced. |
| --- | --- |

2.36.

“Retreading production unit” means a site or group of localised sites where finished retread tyres are produced.

| 2.37. | “Retreading” means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface. It covers the following process methods: |
| --- | --- |

2.37.

“Retreading” means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface. It covers the following process methods:

| 2.37.1. | “Top capping” — replacement of the tread. |
| --- | --- |

2.37.1.

“Top capping” — replacement of the tread.

| 2.37.2. | “Re-capping” — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall. |
| --- | --- |

2.37.2.

“Re-capping” — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall.

| 2.37.3. | “Bead to bead” — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.37.3.

“Bead to bead” — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.

| 2.38. | “Casing” is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material. |
| --- | --- |

2.38.

“Casing” is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material.

| 2.39. | “Buffing” is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material. |
| --- | --- |

2.39.

“Buffing” is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material.

| 2.40. | “Repair” is the remedial work carried out to damaged casings within recognised limits. |
| --- | --- |

2.40.

“Repair” is the remedial work carried out to damaged casings within recognised limits.

| 2.41. | “Tread material” is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example: |
| --- | --- |

2.41.

“Tread material” is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:

| 2.41.1. | “Camel-back” — pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.1.

“Camel-back” — pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.

| 2.41.2. | “Strip-wound” — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.2.

“Strip-wound” — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.

| 2.41.3. | “Direct extrusion” — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.3.

“Direct extrusion” — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.

| 2.41.4. | “Pre-cured” — a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.4.

“Pre-cured” — a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.

| 2.42. | “Sidewall veneer” is material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed. |
| --- | --- |

2.42.

“Sidewall veneer” is material used to cover the sidewalls of the casing thereby allowing the required markings to be formed.

| 2.43. | “Cushion gum” is material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage. |
| --- | --- |

2.43.

“Cushion gum” is material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.

| 2.44. | “Cement” is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process. |
| --- | --- |

2.44.

“Cement” is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process.

| 2.45. | “Cure” is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions. |
| --- | --- |

2.45.

“Cure” is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions.

| 2.46. | “Radial run out” means the variation in radius of the tyre measured around the outer circumference of the tread surface. |
| --- | --- |

2.46.

“Radial run out” means the variation in radius of the tyre measured around the outer circumference of the tread surface.

| 2.47. | “Imbalance” means a measurement of the variation in distribution of mass around the centre axis of the tyre. It can be measured as either “Static” or “Dynamic” imbalance. |
| --- | --- |

2.47.

“Imbalance” means a measurement of the variation in distribution of mass around the centre axis of the tyre. It can be measured as either “Static” or “Dynamic” imbalance.

3.   MARKINGS

| 3.1. | An example of the arrangement of retreaded tyre markings is shown in Annex 3 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

An example of the arrangement of retreaded tyre markings is shown in Annex 3 to this Regulation.

| 3.2. | Retreaded tyres shall display on both sidewalls in the case of symmetrical tyres and at least on the outer sidewall in the case of asymmetrical tyres: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

Retreaded tyres shall display on both sidewalls in the case of symmetrical tyres and at least on the outer sidewall in the case of asymmetrical tyres:

| 3.2.1. | The brand name or trade mark. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

The brand name or trade mark.

| 3.2.2. | The tyre-size designation as defined in paragraph 2.21. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

The tyre-size designation as defined in paragraph 2.21.

| 3.2.3. | An indication of the structure as follows: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

An indication of the structure as follows:

| 3.2.3.1. | On diagonal (bias-ply) tyres; no indication, or the letter “D” placed in front of the rim diameter marking. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.1.

On diagonal (bias-ply) tyres; no indication, or the letter “D” placed in front of the rim diameter marking.

| 3.2.3.2. | On radial-ply tyres; the letter “R” placed in front of the rim-diameter marking and optionally the word “RADIAL”. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.2.

On radial-ply tyres; the letter “R” placed in front of the rim-diameter marking and optionally the word “RADIAL”.

| 3.2.3.3. | On bias belted tyres; the letter “B” placed in front of the rim diameter marking and in addition the words “BIAS-BELTED”. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.3.

On bias belted tyres; the letter “B” placed in front of the rim diameter marking and in addition the words “BIAS-BELTED”.

| 3.2.4. | The service description comprising: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

The service description comprising:

| 3.2.4.1. | An indication of the tyre's nominal load capacity in the form of the load index prescribed in paragraph 2.33. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.1.

An indication of the tyre's nominal load capacity in the form of the load index prescribed in paragraph 2.33.

| 3.2.4.2. | An indication of the tyre's nominal speed capability in the form of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 2.34. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.2.

An indication of the tyre's nominal speed capability in the form of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 2.34.

| 3.2.5. | The word “TUBELESS” if the tyre is designed for use without an inner tube. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

The word “TUBELESS” if the tyre is designed for use without an inner tube.

| 3.2.6. | The inscription M+S or MS or M.S. or M & S in the case of a snow tyre. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.

The inscription M+S or MS or M.S. or M & S in the case of a snow tyre.

| 3.2.7. | The date of retreading as follows: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.

The date of retreading as follows:

| 3.2.7.1. | Up to 31 December 1999; either as prescribed in paragraph 3.2.7.2 or in the form of a group of three digits, the first two showing the week number and the third, the year of the decade of manufacture. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “253” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 1993.
  The date code may be marked on one sidewall only. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.1.

Up to 31 December 1999; either as prescribed in paragraph 3.2.7.2 or in the form of a group of three digits, the first two showing the week number and the third, the year of the decade of manufacture. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “253” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 1993.

The date code may be marked on one sidewall only.

| 3.2.7.2. | As from 1 January 2000; in the form of a group of four digits, the first two showing the week number and the second two showing the year in which the tyre was retreaded. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “2503” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 2003.
  The date code may be marked on one sidewall only. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.2.

As from 1 January 2000; in the form of a group of four digits, the first two showing the week number and the second two showing the year in which the tyre was retreaded. The date code can cover a period of production from the week indicated by the week number up to and including the week number plus three. For example, the marking “2503” could indicate a tyre which was retreaded in weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 2003.

The date code may be marked on one sidewall only.

| 3.2.8. | The term “RETREAD” or “REMOULD” (after 1 January 1999 only the word “RETREAD” shall be used). At the request of the retreader, the same term in other languages may also be added. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.

The term “RETREAD” or “REMOULD” (after 1 January 1999 only the word “RETREAD” shall be used). At the request of the retreader, the same term in other languages may also be added.

| 3.3. | Prior to approval tyres shall exhibit a free space sufficiently large to accommodate an approval mark as referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

Prior to approval tyres shall exhibit a free space sufficiently large to accommodate an approval mark as referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation.

| 3.4. | Following approval, the markings referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation shall be affixed in the free space referred to in paragraph 3.3. This marking may be affixed to one sidewall only. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

Following approval, the markings referred to in paragraph 5.8 and as shown in Annex 2 to this Regulation shall be affixed in the free space referred to in paragraph 3.3. This marking may be affixed to one sidewall only.

| 3.5. | The markings referred to in paragraph 3.2 and the approval mark prescribed in paragraphs 3.4 and 5.8 shall be clearly legible and shall be moulded on to or into the tyre or shall be permanently marked on to the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.

The markings referred to in paragraph 3.2 and the approval mark prescribed in paragraphs 3.4 and 5.8 shall be clearly legible and shall be moulded on to or into the tyre or shall be permanently marked on to the tyre.

| 3.6. | As far as any of the original manufacturer's specifications are still legible after the tyres have been retreaded, they shall be regarded as specifications of the retreader for the retreaded tyre. If these original specifications do not apply after retreading they shall be completely removed. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.

As far as any of the original manufacturer's specifications are still legible after the tyres have been retreaded, they shall be regarded as specifications of the retreader for the retreaded tyre. If these original specifications do not apply after retreading they shall be completely removed.

| 3.7. | The original “E” or “e” approval mark and number shall be removed. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.

The original “E” or “e” approval mark and number shall be removed.

4.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

The following procedures are applicable to the approval of a tyre retreading production unit.

| 4.1. | The application for approval of a retreading production unit shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or trade mark to be applied to the tyre or by his duly accredited representative. It shall specify: |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

The application for approval of a retreading production unit shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or trade mark to be applied to the tyre or by his duly accredited representative. It shall specify:

| 4.1.1. | An outline of the structure of the company producing the retreaded tyres. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.1.

An outline of the structure of the company producing the retreaded tyres.

| 4.1.2. | A brief description of the quality management system, which ensures the effective control of the tyre retreading procedures to meet the requirements of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.2.

A brief description of the quality management system, which ensures the effective control of the tyre retreading procedures to meet the requirements of this Regulation.

| 4.1.3. | The trade names or marks to be applied to the retreaded tyres produced. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.3.

The trade names or marks to be applied to the retreaded tyres produced.

| 4.1.4. | The following information in relation to the range of tyres to be retreaded: |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.

The following information in relation to the range of tyres to be retreaded:

| 4.1.4.1. | the range of tyre sizes; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.1.

the range of tyre sizes;

| 4.1.4.2. | the structure of tyres (diagonal or bias ply, bias-belted or radial); |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.2.

the structure of tyres (diagonal or bias ply, bias-belted or radial);

| 4.1.4.3. | the category of use of tyres (normal or snow tyres etc.); |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.3.

the category of use of tyres (normal or snow tyres etc.);

| 4.1.4.4. | the system of retreading and the method of application of the new materials to be used, as defined in paragraphs 2.37 and 2.41; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.4.

the system of retreading and the method of application of the new materials to be used, as defined in paragraphs 2.37 and 2.41;

| 4.1.4.5. | the maximum speed symbol of the tyres to be retreaded; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.5.

the maximum speed symbol of the tyres to be retreaded;

| 4.1.4.6. | the maximum load index of the tyres to be retreaded. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.6.

the maximum load index of the tyres to be retreaded.

| 4.1.4.7. | the nominated International Tyre Standard to which the range of tyres conform. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.7.

the nominated International Tyre Standard to which the range of tyres conform.

5.   APPROVAL

| 5.1. | To retread tyres requires the approval of the retreading production unit by the responsible authorities in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation. The responsible authority takes the necessary measures as described in this Regulation in order to ensure that the tyres retreaded in the respective production unit will meet with the requirements stated in this Regulation. The retread production unit shall be fully responsible for ensuring that the retreaded tyres will meet the requirements of this Regulation and that they will perform adequately in normal use. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

To retread tyres requires the approval of the retreading production unit by the responsible authorities in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation. The responsible authority takes the necessary measures as described in this Regulation in order to ensure that the tyres retreaded in the respective production unit will meet with the requirements stated in this Regulation. The retread production unit shall be fully responsible for ensuring that the retreaded tyres will meet the requirements of this Regulation and that they will perform adequately in normal use.

| 5.2. | In addition to the normal requirements for the initial assessment of the tyre retreading production unit, the approval authority shall be satisfied that the procedures, operation, instructions and specification documentation provided by material suppliers are in a language readily understood by the tyre retreading production unit operatives. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

In addition to the normal requirements for the initial assessment of the tyre retreading production unit, the approval authority shall be satisfied that the procedures, operation, instructions and specification documentation provided by material suppliers are in a language readily understood by the tyre retreading production unit operatives.

| 5.3. | The approval authority shall ensure that the procedures and operations documentation for each production unit contains specifications, appropriate to the repair materials and processes used, of the limits of repairable damage or penetrations to the tyre carcass, whether such damage is existing or is caused during the processes of preparation for retreading. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

The approval authority shall ensure that the procedures and operations documentation for each production unit contains specifications, appropriate to the repair materials and processes used, of the limits of repairable damage or penetrations to the tyre carcass, whether such damage is existing or is caused during the processes of preparation for retreading.

| 5.4. | Before granting approval the authority must be satisfied that retreaded tyres conform to this Regulation and that the tests prescribed in paragraphs 6.7 and 6.8 have been successfully carried out on at least five and not necessarily more than 20 samples of retreaded tyres representative of the range of tyres produced by the retreading production unit. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.

Before granting approval the authority must be satisfied that retreaded tyres conform to this Regulation and that the tests prescribed in paragraphs 6.7 and 6.8 have been successfully carried out on at least five and not necessarily more than 20 samples of retreaded tyres representative of the range of tyres produced by the retreading production unit.

| 5.5. | In the case of each failure being recorded during tests, two further samples of the same specification tyre shall be tested.
  If either or both of these second two samples fail, then a final submission of two samples shall be tested.
  If either or both of the final two samples fail, then the application for approval of the retreading production unit shall be rejected. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.

In the case of each failure being recorded during tests, two further samples of the same specification tyre shall be tested.

If either or both of these second two samples fail, then a final submission of two samples shall be tested.

If either or both of the final two samples fail, then the application for approval of the retreading production unit shall be rejected.

| 5.6. | If all the requirements of this Regulation are met, then approval shall be granted and an approval number shall be assigned to each retreading production unit approved. The first two digits of this number shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The approval number shall be preceded by “108R” signifying that the approval applies to a tyre retreaded as prescribed in this Regulation. The same authority shall not assign the same number to another production unit covered by this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.

If all the requirements of this Regulation are met, then approval shall be granted and an approval number shall be assigned to each retreading production unit approved. The first two digits of this number shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The approval number shall be preceded by “108R” signifying that the approval applies to a tyre retreaded as prescribed in this Regulation. The same authority shall not assign the same number to another production unit covered by this Regulation.

| 5.7. | Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.

Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

| 5.8. | There shall be affixed conspicuously to every retreaded tyre conforming to this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 3.3 and in addition to the markings prescribed in paragraph 3.2, an international approval mark consisting of: |
| --- | --- |

5.8.

There shall be affixed conspicuously to every retreaded tyre conforming to this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 3.3 and in addition to the markings prescribed in paragraph 3.2, an international approval mark consisting of:

| 5.8.1. | A circle surrounding the letter “E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which granted approval (8); and |
| --- | --- |

5.8.1.

A circle surrounding the letter “E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which granted approval (8); and

| 5.8.2. | An approval number as described in paragraph 5.6. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.2.

An approval number as described in paragraph 5.6.

| 5.9. | Annex 2 to this Regulation gives an example of the arrangements of the approval mark. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.

Annex 2 to this Regulation gives an example of the arrangements of the approval mark.

6.   REQUIREMENTS

| 6.1. | Tyres shall not be accepted for retreading unless they have been type approved and bear either an “E” or “e” mark, except that this requirement shall not be mandatory until 1 January 2000 at the latest. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

Tyres shall not be accepted for retreading unless they have been type approved and bear either an “E” or “e” mark, except that this requirement shall not be mandatory until 1 January 2000 at the latest.

| 6.1.1. | High speed tyres which have only the inscription “ZR” within the tyre size designation and do not bear a service description shall not be retreaded. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.1.

High speed tyres which have only the inscription “ZR” within the tyre size designation and do not bear a service description shall not be retreaded.

| 6.2. | Tyres which have been previously retreaded shall not be accepted for further retreading. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

Tyres which have been previously retreaded shall not be accepted for further retreading.

| 6.3. | The age of the casing accepted for retreading shall not exceed seven years, based on the digits showing the year of manufacture of the original tyre; e.g. the tyre marked with a date code “253” can be accepted for retreading till the end of the year 2000. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

The age of the casing accepted for retreading shall not exceed seven years, based on the digits showing the year of manufacture of the original tyre; e.g. the tyre marked with a date code “253” can be accepted for retreading till the end of the year 2000.

| 6.4. | Conditions before retreading: |
| --- | --- |

6.4.

Conditions before retreading:

| 6.4.1. | Tyres shall be clean and dry before inspection. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1.

Tyres shall be clean and dry before inspection.

| 6.4.2. | Before buffing, each tyre shall be thoroughly examined both internally and externally to ensure its suitability for retreading. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.2.

Before buffing, each tyre shall be thoroughly examined both internally and externally to ensure its suitability for retreading.

| 6.4.3. | Tyres where damage is visible which has resulted from overload or underinflation shall not be retreaded. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.3.

Tyres where damage is visible which has resulted from overload or underinflation shall not be retreaded.

| 6.4.4. | Tyres showing any of the following damage shall not be accepted for retreading: |
| --- | --- |

6.4.4.

Tyres showing any of the following damage shall not be accepted for retreading:

| 6.4.4.1. | (a) | extensive cracking extending through to the carcass; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.4.4.1.

(a)

extensive cracking extending through to the carcass;

| (b) | carcass penetrations or damage to casings above “H” speed symbol except where these casings are to be downrated to a lower speed symbol; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

carcass penetrations or damage to casings above “H” speed symbol except where these casings are to be downrated to a lower speed symbol;

| (c) | previous repairs to damage outside specified injury limits — see paragraph 5.3; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

previous repairs to damage outside specified injury limits — see paragraph 5.3;

| (d) | carcas break up; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

carcas break up;

| (e) | appreciable oil or chemical attack; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

appreciable oil or chemical attack;

| (f) | multiple damage too close together; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

multiple damage too close together;

| (g) | damaged or broken bead; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

damaged or broken bead;

| (h) | non repairable deterioration of or damage to inner liner; |
| --- | --- |

(h)

non repairable deterioration of or damage to inner liner;

| (i) | bead damage other than minor “rubber” only damage; |
| --- | --- |

(i)

bead damage other than minor “rubber” only damage;

| (j) | exposed cords due to tread wear or sidewall scuffing; |
| --- | --- |

(j)

exposed cords due to tread wear or sidewall scuffing;

| (k) | non-repairable tread or sidewall material separation from the carcass; |
| --- | --- |

(k)

non-repairable tread or sidewall material separation from the carcass;

| (l) | structural damage in the area of the sidewall. |
| --- | --- |

(l)

structural damage in the area of the sidewall.

| 6.4.5. | Radial ply tyre carcasses with separation in the belt, other than slight belt edge looseness, shall not be accepted for retreading. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.5.

Radial ply tyre carcasses with separation in the belt, other than slight belt edge looseness, shall not be accepted for retreading.

| 6.5. | Preparation: |
| --- | --- |

6.5.

Preparation:

| 6.5.1. | After buffing, and before the application of new material, each tyre shall be thoroughly re-examined at least externally to ensure its continued suitability for retreading. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.1.

After buffing, and before the application of new material, each tyre shall be thoroughly re-examined at least externally to ensure its continued suitability for retreading.

| 6.5.2. | The entire surface to which new material is to be applied shall have been prepared without overheating. The buffed surface texture shall not contain deep buffing lacerations or loose material. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.2.

The entire surface to which new material is to be applied shall have been prepared without overheating. The buffed surface texture shall not contain deep buffing lacerations or loose material.

| 6.5.3. | Where precured material is to be used the contours of the prepared area shall meet the requirements of the material manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.3.

Where precured material is to be used the contours of the prepared area shall meet the requirements of the material manufacturer.

| 6.5.4. | Loose cord ends are not permissible. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.4.

Loose cord ends are not permissible.

| 6.5.5. | Casing cords shall not be damaged during the preparation process. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.5.

Casing cords shall not be damaged during the preparation process.

| 6.5.6. | Buffing damage to the belt of radial tyres shall be limited to localised damage to the outermost layer only. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.6.

Buffing damage to the belt of radial tyres shall be limited to localised damage to the outermost layer only.

| 6.5.7. | Buffing damage limits for diagonal ply tyres shall be as follows: |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.

Buffing damage limits for diagonal ply tyres shall be as follows:

| 6.5.7.1. | For two ply construction, there shall not be any damage to the carcass except for slight localised buffing damage to the casing joint. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.1.

For two ply construction, there shall not be any damage to the carcass except for slight localised buffing damage to the casing joint.

| 6.5.7.2. | For two ply plus breaker construction of tubeless type tyres, there shall not be any damage to the carcass or breaker. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.2.

For two ply plus breaker construction of tubeless type tyres, there shall not be any damage to the carcass or breaker.

| 6.5.7.3. | For two ply plus breaker construction of tube type tyres, localised damage to the breaker is permissible. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.3.

For two ply plus breaker construction of tube type tyres, localised damage to the breaker is permissible.

| 6.5.7.4. | For four ply, or more, construction of tubeless type tyres, there shall not be any damage to the carcass or breaker. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.4.

For four ply, or more, construction of tubeless type tyres, there shall not be any damage to the carcass or breaker.

| 6.5.7.5. | For four ply, or more, construction of tube type tyres, damage shall be limited to the outermost ply in the crown area only. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.5.

For four ply, or more, construction of tube type tyres, damage shall be limited to the outermost ply in the crown area only.

| 6.5.8. | Exposed steel parts shall be treated as soon as possible with appropriate material as defined by the manufacturer of that appropriate material. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.8.

Exposed steel parts shall be treated as soon as possible with appropriate material as defined by the manufacturer of that appropriate material.

| 6.6. | Retreading: |
| --- | --- |

6.6.

Retreading:

| 6.6.1. | The retreader must ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of repair materials, including patches, is responsible for the following:






  (a) | defining method(s) of application and storage, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.6.1.

The retreader must ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of repair materials, including patches, is responsible for the following:

(a)

defining method(s) of application and storage, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used;

| (b) | defining limits of damage for which the materials are designed, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

defining limits of damage for which the materials are designed, if requested by the retreader, in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used;

| (c) | ensuring that reinforced patches for tyres, if correctly applied in carcass repairs, are suitable for the purpose; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

ensuring that reinforced patches for tyres, if correctly applied in carcass repairs, are suitable for the purpose;

| (d) | ensuring that the patches are capable of withstanding twice the maximum inflation pressure as given by the tyre manufacturer; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

ensuring that the patches are capable of withstanding twice the maximum inflation pressure as given by the tyre manufacturer;

| (e) | ensuring the suitability of any other repair materials for the service intended. |
| --- | --- |

(e)

ensuring the suitability of any other repair materials for the service intended.

| 6.6.2. | The retreader shall be responsible for the correct application of the repair material and for ensuring that the repair is free from any defects which may affect the satisfactory service life of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2.

The retreader shall be responsible for the correct application of the repair material and for ensuring that the repair is free from any defects which may affect the satisfactory service life of the tyre.

| 6.6.3. | The retreader shall ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of tread and sidewall material issues specifications concerning the conditions of storage and use of the material in order to guarantee the material's qualities. If requested by the retreader, this information shall be in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3.

The retreader shall ensure that either the manufacturer or the supplier of tread and sidewall material issues specifications concerning the conditions of storage and use of the material in order to guarantee the material's qualities. If requested by the retreader, this information shall be in the national language of the country in which the materials are to be used.

| 6.6.4. | The retreader must ensure that the repair material and/or compound is documented in a manufacturer's or supplier's certificate. The material compound must be suitable for the intended use of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.4.

The retreader must ensure that the repair material and/or compound is documented in a manufacturer's or supplier's certificate. The material compound must be suitable for the intended use of the tyre.

| 6.6.5. | The processed tyre shall be cured as soon as possible after the completion of all repairs and building-up operations and at the latest according to the material manufacturer's specifications. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.5.

The processed tyre shall be cured as soon as possible after the completion of all repairs and building-up operations and at the latest according to the material manufacturer's specifications.

| 6.6.6. | The tyre shall be cured for the length of time and at the temperature and pressure, appropriate to, and specified for, the materials and processing equipment used. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.6.

The tyre shall be cured for the length of time and at the temperature and pressure, appropriate to, and specified for, the materials and processing equipment used.

| 6.6.7. | The dimensions of the mould shall be appropriate to the thickness of the new material and the size of the buffed casing. Radial ply tyres, when moulded, shall be cured in radial or radially divided moulds only. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.7.

The dimensions of the mould shall be appropriate to the thickness of the new material and the size of the buffed casing. Radial ply tyres, when moulded, shall be cured in radial or radially divided moulds only.

| 6.6.8. | The thickness of original material after buffing and the average thickness of any new material under the tread pattern after retreading shall be as given in paragraphs 6.6.8.1 and 6.6.8.2. The thickness of material at any point either across the breadth of the tread or around the circumference of the tyre shall be controlled in such a way that the provisions of paragraphs 6.7.5 and 6.7.6 are met. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.8.

The thickness of original material after buffing and the average thickness of any new material under the tread pattern after retreading shall be as given in paragraphs 6.6.8.1 and 6.6.8.2. The thickness of material at any point either across the breadth of the tread or around the circumference of the tyre shall be controlled in such a way that the provisions of paragraphs 6.7.5 and 6.7.6 are met.

| 6.6.8.1. | For radial ply and bias belted tyres (mm):
  1,5 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 5 (minimum 1,5 mm; maximum 5,0 mm)
  A ≥ 1A 1A 1A 1A 1 (minimum 1,0 mm)
  B ≥ 0.5B 0.5B 0.5B 0.5B 0.5 (minimum 0,5 mm)



  P.D. = Pattern depth
  X = Buff line
  A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under pattern
  B = Minimum thickness of original material above belt after buffing |
| --- | --- |

6.6.8.1.

For radial ply and bias belted tyres (mm):

1,5 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 5 (minimum 1,5 mm; maximum 5,0 mm)

A ≥ 1A 1A 1A 1A 1 (minimum 1,0 mm)

B ≥ 0.5B 0.5B 0.5B 0.5B 0.5 (minimum 0,5 mm)

Image

P.D. = Pattern depth

X = Buff line

A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under patternP.D. = Pattern depth X = Buff line A = Average thickness of new material under pattern

B = Minimum thickness of original material above belt after buffing

| 6.6.8.2. | For diagonal (Bias-ply) tyres:
  The thickness of original material above the breaker shall be ≥ 0,00 mm.
  The average thickness of new material above the buffed casing line shall be ≥ 2,00 mm.
  The combined thickness of original and new material beneath the base of the grooves of the tread pattern shall be ≥ 2,00 and ≤ 5,00 mm. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.8.2.

For diagonal (Bias-ply) tyres:

The thickness of original material above the breaker shall be ≥ 0,00 mm.

The average thickness of new material above the buffed casing line shall be ≥ 2,00 mm.

The combined thickness of original and new material beneath the base of the grooves of the tread pattern shall be ≥ 2,00 and ≤ 5,00 mm.

| 6.6.9. | The service description of a retreaded tyre shall not show either a higher speed symbol or a higher load index than that of the original, first life, tyre. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.9.

The service description of a retreaded tyre shall not show either a higher speed symbol or a higher load index than that of the original, first life, tyre.

| 6.6.10. | The minimum speed capability of a retreaded tyre shall be 120 km/h (“L” speed symbol) and the maximum shall be 300 km/h (“Y” speed symbol). |
| --- | --- |

6.6.10.

The minimum speed capability of a retreaded tyre shall be 120 km/h (“L” speed symbol) and the maximum shall be 300 km/h (“Y” speed symbol).

| 6.6.11. | Tread wear indicators shall be incorporated as follows: |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.

Tread wear indicators shall be incorporated as follows:

| 6.6.11.1. | The retreaded pneumatic tyre shall include not less than six transverse rows of wear indicators, approximately equispaced and situated in the principal grooves of the tread. The tread wear indicators shall be such that they cannot be confused with the material ridges between the ribs or blocks of the tread. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.1.

The retreaded pneumatic tyre shall include not less than six transverse rows of wear indicators, approximately equispaced and situated in the principal grooves of the tread. The tread wear indicators shall be such that they cannot be confused with the material ridges between the ribs or blocks of the tread.

| 6.6.11.2. | However, in the case of tyres designed for mounting on rims of a nominal diameter of code 12 or less, four rows of tread wear indicators are permissible. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.2.

However, in the case of tyres designed for mounting on rims of a nominal diameter of code 12 or less, four rows of tread wear indicators are permissible.

| 6.6.11.3. | The tread wear indicators shall provide a means of indicating, with a tolerance of + 0,60/‐0,00 mm, when the tread grooves are no longer more than 1,6 mm deep. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.3.

The tread wear indicators shall provide a means of indicating, with a tolerance of + 0,60/‐0,00 mm, when the tread grooves are no longer more than 1,6 mm deep.

| 6.6.11.4. | The height of the tread wear indicators shall be determined by measuring the difference between the depth from the tread surface to the top of the tread wear indicators and the base of the tread grooves, close to the slope at the base of the tread wear indicators. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.4.

The height of the tread wear indicators shall be determined by measuring the difference between the depth from the tread surface to the top of the tread wear indicators and the base of the tread grooves, close to the slope at the base of the tread wear indicators.

| 6.7. | Inspection: |
| --- | --- |

6.7.

Inspection:

| 6.7.1. | After curing, whilst a degree of heat is retained in a tyre, each retreaded tyre shall be examined to ensure that it is free from any apparent defects. During or after retreading the tyre must be inflated to at least 1,5 bar for examination. Where there is any apparent defect in the profile of the tyre (e.g. blister, depression, etc.) the tyre shall be specifically examined to determine the cause of this defect. |
| --- | --- |

6.7.1.

After curing, whilst a degree of heat is retained in a tyre, each retreaded tyre shall be examined to ensure that it is free from any apparent defects. During or after retreading the tyre must be inflated to at least 1,5 bar for examination. Where there is any apparent defect in the profile of the tyre (e.g. blister, depression, etc.) the tyre shall be specifically examined to determine the cause of this defect.

| 6.7.2. | Before, during or after retreading the tyre shall be checked at least once for the integrity of its structure by means of a suitable inspection method. |
| --- | --- |

6.7.2.

Before, during or after retreading the tyre shall be checked at least once for the integrity of its structure by means of a suitable inspection method.

| 6.7.3. | For the purposes of quality control a number of retreaded tyres shall be subjected to destructive and/or non-destructive testing or examination. The quantity of tyres checked and the results shall be recorded. |
| --- | --- |

6.7.3.

For the purposes of quality control a number of retreaded tyres shall be subjected to destructive and/or non-destructive testing or examination. The quantity of tyres checked and the results shall be recorded.

| 6.7.4. | After retreading, the dimensions of the retreaded tyre, when measured in accordance with Annex 6 to this Regulation, must conform either to dimensions calculated according to the procedures in paragraph 7 or to Annex 5 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.7.4.

After retreading, the dimensions of the retreaded tyre, when measured in accordance with Annex 6 to this Regulation, must conform either to dimensions calculated according to the procedures in paragraph 7 or to Annex 5 to this Regulation.

| 6.7.5. | The radial run out of the retreaded tyre shall not exceed 1,5 mm (+0,4 mm measuring tolerance). |
| --- | --- |

6.7.5.

The radial run out of the retreaded tyre shall not exceed 1,5 mm (+0,4 mm measuring tolerance).

| 6.7.6. | The maximum static imbalance of the retreaded tyre, measured at the rim diameter, shall not exceed 1,5 % of the mass of the tyre. |
| --- | --- |

6.7.6.

The maximum static imbalance of the retreaded tyre, measured at the rim diameter, shall not exceed 1,5 % of the mass of the tyre.

| 6.7.7. | Tread wear indicators shall conform to the requirements of paragraph 6.6.11. |
| --- | --- |

6.7.7.

Tread wear indicators shall conform to the requirements of paragraph 6.6.11.

| 6.8. | Performance test: |
| --- | --- |

6.8.

Performance test:

| 6.8.1. | Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall be capable of meeting the load/speed endurance test as specified in Annex 7 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.8.1.

Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall be capable of meeting the load/speed endurance test as specified in Annex 7 to this Regulation.

| 6.8.2. | A retreaded tyre which after undergoing the load/speed endurance test does not exhibit any tread separation, ply separation, cord separation, chunking or broken cords shall be deemed to have passed the test. |
| --- | --- |

6.8.2.

A retreaded tyre which after undergoing the load/speed endurance test does not exhibit any tread separation, ply separation, cord separation, chunking or broken cords shall be deemed to have passed the test.

| 6.8.3. | The outer diameter of the tyre, measured six hours after the load/speed endurance test, must not differ by more than ± 3,5 % from the outer diameter as measured before the test. |
| --- | --- |

6.8.3.

The outer diameter of the tyre, measured six hours after the load/speed endurance test, must not differ by more than ± 3,5 % from the outer diameter as measured before the test.

7.   SPECIFICATIONS

| 7.1. | Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall conform to the following dimensions: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Tyres retreaded to comply with this Regulation shall conform to the following dimensions:

| 7.1.1. | Section width: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1.

Section width:

| 7.1.1.1. | The section width shall be calculated by the following formula:
  S = S1 + K (A — A1)
  where:
  S: is the actual section width in millimetres as measured on the test rim;
  S1: is the value of the “Design Section Width”, referred to the measuring rim, as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question;
  A: is the width of the test rim in millimetres;
  A1: is the width in millimetres of the measuring rim as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question.
  K: is a factor and shall be taken to equal 0,4. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1.1.

The section width shall be calculated by the following formula:

S = S1 + K (A — A1)

where:

S: is the actual section width in millimetres as measured on the test rim;

S1: is the value of the “Design Section Width”, referred to the measuring rim, as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question;

A: is the width of the test rim in millimetres;

A1: is the width in millimetres of the measuring rim as quoted in the International Tyre Standard specified by the retreader for the tyre size in question.

K: is a factor and shall be taken to equal 0,4.

| 7.1.2. | Outer diameter: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.

Outer diameter:

| 7.1.2.1. | The theoretical outer diameter of a retreaded tyre shall be calculated by the following formula:
  D = d + 2H
  where:
  D: is the theoretical outer diameter in millimetres;
  d: is the conventional number defined in paragraph 2.21.3, in millimetres;
  H: is nominal section height in millimetres and is equal to Sn multiplied by 0,01 Ra where:
  where:
  Sn: is the nominal section width in millimetres;
  Ra: is the nominal aspect ratio.
  All of the above symbols are as quoted in the tyre size designation as shown on the sidewall of the tyre in conformity with the requirements of paragraph 3.2.2 and as defined in paragraph 2.21. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.1.

The theoretical outer diameter of a retreaded tyre shall be calculated by the following formula:

D = d + 2H

where:

D: is the theoretical outer diameter in millimetres;

d: is the conventional number defined in paragraph 2.21.3, in millimetres;

H: is nominal section height in millimetres and is equal to Sn multiplied by 0,01 Ra where:

where:

Sn: is the nominal section width in millimetres;

Ra: is the nominal aspect ratio.

All of the above symbols are as quoted in the tyre size designation as shown on the sidewall of the tyre in conformity with the requirements of paragraph 3.2.2 and as defined in paragraph 2.21.

| 7.1.2.2. | However, for tyres whose designation is given in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to ECE Regulation No. 30, the outer diameter shall be that given in those tables. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.2.

However, for tyres whose designation is given in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to ECE Regulation No. 30, the outer diameter shall be that given in those tables.

| 7.1.3. | Method of measuring retreaded tyres: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3.

Method of measuring retreaded tyres:

| 7.1.3.1. | The dimensions of retreaded tyres shall be measured in accordance with the procedures given in Annex 6 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3.1.

The dimensions of retreaded tyres shall be measured in accordance with the procedures given in Annex 6 to this Regulation.

| 7.1.4. | Section width specifications: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.

Section width specifications:

| 7.1.4.1. | The actual overall width may be less than the section width or widths determined in paragraph 7.1. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.1.

The actual overall width may be less than the section width or widths determined in paragraph 7.1.

| 7.1.4.2. | The actual overall width may also exceed the value or values determined in paragraph 7.1 by: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.

The actual overall width may also exceed the value or values determined in paragraph 7.1 by:

| 7.1.4.2.1. | 4 % in the case of radial ply tyres and |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.1.

4 % in the case of radial ply tyres and

| 7.1.4.2.2. | 6 % in the case of diagonal (bias-ply) or bias belted tyres. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.2.

6 % in the case of diagonal (bias-ply) or bias belted tyres.

| 7.1.4.2.3. | in addition, if the tyre has a special protective band, the width may be greater by up to 8 mm above the tolerances given by paragraphs 7.1.4.2.1 and 7.1.4.2.2 |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.3.

in addition, if the tyre has a special protective band, the width may be greater by up to 8 mm above the tolerances given by paragraphs 7.1.4.2.1 and 7.1.4.2.2

| 7.1.5. | Outer diameter specifications: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.

Outer diameter specifications:

| 7.1.5.1. | The actual outer diameter of a retreaded tyre must not be outside the values of Dmin and Dmax obtained by the following formulae:
  Dmin = d + (2H x a)
  Dmax = d + (2H x b)
  where: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.

The actual outer diameter of a retreaded tyre must not be outside the values of Dmin and Dmax obtained by the following formulae:

Dmin = d + (2H x a)

Dmax = d + (2H x b)

where:

| 7.1.5.1.1. | For sizes not given in the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation, “H” and “d” are as defined in paragraph 7.1.2.1. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.1.

For sizes not given in the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation, “H” and “d” are as defined in paragraph 7.1.2.1.

| 7.1.5.1.2. | For sizes mentioned in paragraph 7.1.2.2 above:
  H = 0,5 (D — d)
  where “D” is the outer diameter and “d” the Nominal rim diameter quoted in the abovementioned tables for the size in question. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.2.

For sizes mentioned in paragraph 7.1.2.2 above:

H = 0,5 (D — d)

where “D” is the outer diameter and “d” the Nominal rim diameter quoted in the abovementioned tables for the size in question.

| 7.1.5.1.3. | The coefficient “a” = 0,97 |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.3.

The coefficient “a” = 0,97

| 7.1.5.1.4. | The coefficient “b” is: | Radial tyres | Diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| for normal use tyres | 1,04 | 1,08 |

7.1.5.1.4.

The coefficient “b” is:

Radial tyres

Diagonal (bias-ply) and bias belted tyres

for normal use tyres

1,04

1,08

| 7.1.5.2. | For snow tyres the maximum outer diameter (Dmax) calculated in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may be exceeded by not more than 1 %. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.2.

For snow tyres the maximum outer diameter (Dmax) calculated in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may be exceeded by not more than 1 %.

8.   MODIFICATIONS TO THE APPROVAL

| 8.1. | Every modification concerning a retreading production unit amending any of the information given by the retreading production unit in the Application for Approval, see paragraph 4, shall be notified to the approval authority which approved the retreading production unit. That authority may then either: |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

Every modification concerning a retreading production unit amending any of the information given by the retreading production unit in the Application for Approval, see paragraph 4, shall be notified to the approval authority which approved the retreading production unit. That authority may then either:

| 8.1.1. | Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the retreading production unit still meets the requirements; or |
| --- | --- |

8.1.1.

Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the retreading production unit still meets the requirements; or

| 8.1.2. | Require a further investigation of the approval. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.2.

Require a further investigation of the approval.

| 8.2. | Confirmation of, or refusal of, approval, specifying the modifications, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 5.7 to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

Confirmation of, or refusal of, approval, specifying the modifications, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 5.7 to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation.

9.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements.

| 9.1. | The retreading production unit approved according to this Regulation shall conform to the requirements set out in paragraph 6. |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

The retreading production unit approved according to this Regulation shall conform to the requirements set out in paragraph 6.

| 9.2. | The holder of the approval shall ensure that, during each year of production, and spread throughout that year, at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, is checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation: |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

The holder of the approval shall ensure that, during each year of production, and spread throughout that year, at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, is checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation:

| 9.2.1. | 0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than five and not necessarily more than 20. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.1.

0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than five and not necessarily more than 20.

| 9.3. | If the requirements of paragraph 9.2 are carried out by or under the control of the approval authority, the results may be used as part of, or instead of, those prescribed in paragraph 9.4. |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

If the requirements of paragraph 9.2 are carried out by or under the control of the approval authority, the results may be used as part of, or instead of, those prescribed in paragraph 9.4.

| 9.4. | The authority which has approved the retreading production unit may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. For each production facility the type approval authority shall take samples at random during each and every production year and at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, shall be checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation: |
| --- | --- |

9.4.

The authority which has approved the retreading production unit may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. For each production facility the type approval authority shall take samples at random during each and every production year and at least the following number of tyres, representative of the range being produced, shall be checked and tested as prescribed in this Regulation:

| 9.4.1. | 0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than five and not necessarily more than 20. |
| --- | --- |

9.4.1.

0,01 % of the total annual production but in any case not less than five and not necessarily more than 20.

| 9.5. | The tests and checks of paragraph 9.4 may replace those required in paragraph 9.2. |
| --- | --- |

9.5.

The tests and checks of paragraph 9.4 may replace those required in paragraph 9.2.

10.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 10.1. | The approval granted in respect of a retreading production unit pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements of paragraph 9 are not complied with or if the retreading production unit or the retreaded tyres produced by that retreading production unit have failed to meet the requirements prescribed in that paragraph. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

The approval granted in respect of a retreading production unit pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements of paragraph 9 are not complied with or if the retreading production unit or the retreaded tyres produced by that retreading production unit have failed to meet the requirements prescribed in that paragraph.

| 10.2. | If a Party to the Agreement which applies this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model shown in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

If a Party to the Agreement which applies this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model shown in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

11.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

The authority which granted the approval of the retreading production unit shall be informed if operations and manufacture of retreaded tyres approved within the scope of this Regulation cease. On receipt of this information the authority shall communicate this information to the other Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model shown in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

12.   Names and addresses of technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, of test laboratories, and of administrative departments

| 12.1. | The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and, where applicable, of the approved test laboratories and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or refusal or withdrawal of approval, issued in other countries, are to be sent. |
| --- | --- |

12.1.

The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and, where applicable, of the approved test laboratories and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or refusal or withdrawal of approval, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

| 12.2. | The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation may use laboratories of tyre manufacturers or retreading production units and may designate, as approved test laboratories, those which are situated either in the territory of that Party or in the territory of another Party to the 1958 Agreement subject to a preliminary acceptance of this procedure by the competent administrative department of the latter. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.

The Parties to the 1958 Agreement which apply this Regulation may use laboratories of tyre manufacturers or retreading production units and may designate, as approved test laboratories, those which are situated either in the territory of that Party or in the territory of another Party to the 1958 Agreement subject to a preliminary acceptance of this procedure by the competent administrative department of the latter.

| 12.3. | Where a Party to the 1958 Agreement applies paragraph 12.2, it may, if it desires, be represented at the tests. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.

Where a Party to the 1958 Agreement applies paragraph 12.2, it may, if it desires, be represented at the tests.

ANNEX 1

COMMUNICATION

(maximum format: A4 (210 x 297 mm))

Image

ANNEX 2

ARRANGEMENT OF APPROVAL MARK

Image

The above approval mark affixed to a retreaded tyre shows that the retreading production unit concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) under approval number 108R002439, meeting the requirements of this Regulation in its original form (00).

The approval number must be placed close to the circle and either above or below the “E” or left or right of that letter. The digits of the approval number must be on the same side of the “E” and face in the same direction. The use of Roman numerals as approval numbers should be avoided so as to prevent any confusion with other symbols.

ANNEX 3

ARRANGEMENT OF RETREAD TYRE MARKINGS

Example of the markings to be borne by retreaded tyres placed on the market after the entry into force of this Regulation

Image

| — | having a nominal section width of 185; |
| --- | --- |

—

having a nominal section width of 185;

| — | having a nominal aspect ratio of 70; |
| --- | --- |

—

having a nominal aspect ratio of 70;

| — | of radial-ply structure (R); |
| --- | --- |

—

of radial-ply structure (R);

| — | having a nominal rim diameter of code 14; |
| --- | --- |

—

having a nominal rim diameter of code 14;

| — | having a service description “89T” indicating a load capacity of 580 kg corresponding to a load index of “89” and a maximum speed capability of 190 km/h corresponding to a speed symbol “T”; |
| --- | --- |

—

having a service description “89T” indicating a load capacity of 580 kg corresponding to a load index of “89” and a maximum speed capability of 190 km/h corresponding to a speed symbol “T”;

| — | for fitting without an inner tube (“TUBELESS”); |
| --- | --- |

—

for fitting without an inner tube (“TUBELESS”);

| — | of snow type (M+S); |
| --- | --- |

—

of snow type (M+S);

| — | retreaded in the weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 2003. |
| --- | --- |

—

retreaded in the weeks 25, 26, 27 or 28 of the year 2003.

The positioning and order of the markings constituting the tyre designation shall be as follows:

| (a) | the size designation, comprising the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio, the type-of-structure symbol (where applicable) and the nominal rim diameter shall be grouped as shown in the above example: 185/70 R 14; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the size designation, comprising the nominal section width, the nominal aspect ratio, the type-of-structure symbol (where applicable) and the nominal rim diameter shall be grouped as shown in the above example: 185/70 R 14;

| (b) | the service description comprising the load index and the speed symbol shall be placed near the size designation. It may either precede the size designation or follow it or be placed above or below it; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the service description comprising the load index and the speed symbol shall be placed near the size designation. It may either precede the size designation or follow it or be placed above or below it;

| (c) | the symbols “TUBELESS”, “REINFORCED”, and “M + S” may be at a distance from the size designation. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

the symbols “TUBELESS”, “REINFORCED”, and “M + S” may be at a distance from the size designation.

| (d) | the word “RETREAD” may be at a distance from the size designation. |
| --- | --- |

(d)

the word “RETREAD” may be at a distance from the size designation.

ANNEX 4

LIST OF LOAD INDICES AND CORRESPONDING LOAD CAPACITIES

| Load index (LI) and load capacity (kg) |
| --- |
| LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg |
| 0 | 45 | 40 | 140 | 80 | 450 | 120 | 1 400 | 160 | 4 500 | 200 | 14 000 | 240 | 45 000 |
| 1 | 46,2 | 41 | 145 | 81 | 462 | 121 | 1 450 | 161 | 4 625 | 201 | 14 500 | 241 | 46 250 |
| 2 | 47,5 | 42 | 150 | 82 | 475 | 122 | 1 500 | 162 | 4 750 | 202 | 15 000 | 242 | 47 500 |
| 3 | 48,7 | 43 | 155 | 83 | 487 | 123 | 1 550 | 163 | 4 875 | 203 | 15 500 | 243 | 48 750 |
| 4 | 50 | 44 | 160 | 84 | 500 | 124 | 1 600 | 164 | 5 000 | 204 | 16 000 | 244 | 50 000 |
| 5 | 51,5 | 45 | 165 | 85 | 515 | 125 | 1 650 | 165 | 5 150 | 205 | 16 500 | 245 | 51 500 |
| 6 | 53 | 46 | 170 | 86 | 530 | 126 | 1 700 | 166 | 5 300 | 206 | 17 000 | 246 | 53 000 |
| 7 | 54,5 | 47 | 175 | 87 | 545 | 127 | 1 750 | 167 | 5 450 | 207 | 17 500 | 247 | 54 500 |
| 8 | 56 | 48 | 180 | 88 | 560 | 128 | 1 800 | 168 | 5 600 | 208 | 18 000 | 248 | 56 000 |
| 9 | 58 | 49 | 185 | 89 | 580 | 129 | 1 850 | 169 | 5 800 | 209 | 18 500 | 249 | 58 000 |
| 10 | 60 | 50 | 190 | 90 | 600 | 130 | 1 900 | 170 | 6 000 | 210 | 19 000 | 250 | 60 000 |
| 11 | 61,5 | 51 | 195 | 91 | 615 | 131 | 1 950 | 171 | 6 150 | 211 | 19 500 | 251 | 61 500 |
| 12 | 63 | 52 | 200 | 92 | 630 | 132 | 2 000 | 172 | 6 300 | 212 | 20 000 | 252 | 63 000 |
| 13 | 65 | 53 | 206 | 93 | 650 | 133 | 2 060 | 173 | 6 500 | 213 | 20 600 | 253 | 65 000 |
| 14 | 67 | 54 | 212 | 94 | 670 | 134 | 2 120 | 174 | 6 700 | 214 | 21 200 | 254 | 67 000 |
| 15 | 69 | 55 | 218 | 95 | 690 | 135 | 2 180 | 175 | 6 900 | 215 | 21 800 | 255 | 69 000 |
| 16 | 71 | 56 | 224 | 96 | 710 | 136 | 2 240 | 176 | 7 100 | 216 | 22 400 | 256 | 71 000 |
| 17 | 73 | 57 | 230 | 97 | 730 | 137 | 2 300 | 177 | 7 300 | 217 | 23 000 | 257 | 73 000 |
| 18 | 75 | 58 | 236 | 98 | 750 | 138 | 2 360 | 178 | 7 500 | 218 | 23 600 | 258 | 75 000 |
| 19 | 77,5 | 59 | 243 | 99 | 775 | 139 | 2 430 | 179 | 7 750 | 219 | 24 300 | 259 | 77 500 |
| 20 | 80 | 60 | 250 | 100 | 800 | 140 | 2 500 | 180 | 8 000 | 220 | 25 000 | 260 | 80 000 |
| 21 | 82,5 | 61 | 257 | 101 | 825 | 141 | 2 575 | 181 | 8 250 | 221 | 25 750 | 261 | 82 500 |
| 22 | 85 | 62 | 265 | 102 | 850 | 142 | 2 650 | 182 | 8 500 | 222 | 26 500 | 262 | 85 000 |
| 23 | 87,5 | 63 | 272 | 103 | 875 | 143 | 2 725 | 183 | 8 750 | 223 | 27 250 | 263 | 87 500 |
| 24 | 90 | 64 | 280 | 104 | 900 | 144 | 2 800 | 184 | 9 000 | 224 | 28 000 | 264 | 90 000 |
| 25 | 92,5 | 65 | 290 | 105 | 925 | 145 | 2 900 | 185 | 9 250 | 225 | 29 000 | 265 | 92 500 |
| 26 | 95 | 66 | 300 | 106 | 950 | 146 | 3 000 | 186 | 9 500 | 226 | 30 000 | 266 | 95 000 |
| 27 | 97,5 | 67 | 307 | 107 | 975 | 147 | 3 075 | 187 | 9 750 | 227 | 30 750 | 267 | 97 500 |
| 28 | 100 | 68 | 315 | 108 | 1 000 | 148 | 3 150 | 188 | 10 000 | 228 | 31 500 | 268 | 100 000 |
| 29 | 103 | 69 | 325 | 109 | 1 030 | 149 | 3 250 | 189 | 10 300 | 229 | 32 500 | 269 | 103 000 |
| 30 | 106 | 70 | 335 | 110 | 1 060 | 150 | 3 350 | 190 | 10 600 | 230 | 33 500 | 270 | 106 000 |
| 31 | 109 | 71 | 345 | 111 | 1 090 | 151 | 3 450 | 191 | 10 900 | 231 | 34 500 | 271 | 109 000 |
| 32 | 112 | 72 | 355 | 112 | 1 120 | 152 | 3 550 | 192 | 11 200 | 232 | 35 500 | 272 | 112 000 |
| 33 | 115 | 73 | 365 | 113 | 1 150 | 153 | 3 650 | 193 | 11 500 | 233 | 36 500 | 273 | 115 000 |
| 34 | 118 | 74 | 375 | 114 | 1 180 | 154 | 3 750 | 194 | 11 800 | 234 | 37 500 | 274 | 118 000 |
| 35 | 121 | 75 | 387 | 115 | 1 215 | 155 | 3 875 | 195 | 12 150 | 235 | 38 750 | 275 | 121 500 |
| 36 | 125 | 76 | 400 | 116 | 1 250 | 156 | 4 000 | 196 | 12 500 | 236 | 40 000 | 276 | 125 000 |
| 37 | 128 | 77 | 412 | 117 | 1 285 | 157 | 4 125 | 197 | 12 850 | 237 | 41 250 | 277 | 128 500 |
| 38 | 132 | 78 | 425 | 118 | 1 320 | 158 | 4 250 | 198 | 13 200 | 238 | 42 500 | 278 | 132 000 |
| 39 | 136 | 79 | 437 | 119 | 1 360 | 159 | 4 375 | 199 | 13 600 | 239 | 43 750 | 279 | 136 000 |

Load index (LI) and load capacity (kg)

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

0

45

40

140

80

450

120

1 400

160

4 500

200

14 000

240

45 000

1

46,2

41

145

81

462

121

1 450

161

4 625

201

14 500

241

46 250

2

47,5

42

150

82

475

122

1 500

162

4 750

202

15 000

242

47 500

3

48,7

43

155

83

487

123

1 550

163

4 875

203

15 500

243

48 750

4

50

44

160

84

500

124

1 600

164

5 000

204

16 000

244

50 000

5

51,5

45

165

85

515

125

1 650

165

5 150

205

16 500

245

51 500

6

53

46

170

86

530

126

1 700

166

5 300

206

17 000

246

53 000

7

54,5

47

175

87

545

127

1 750

167

5 450

207

17 500

247

54 500

8

56

48

180

88

560

128

1 800

168

5 600

208

18 000

248

56 000

9

58

49

185

89

580

129

1 850

169

5 800

209

18 500

249

58 000

10

60

50

190

90

600

130

1 900

170

6 000

210

19 000

250

60 000

11

61,5

51

195

91

615

131

1 950

171

6 150

211

19 500

251

61 500

12

63

52

200

92

630

132

2 000

172

6 300

212

20 000

252

63 000

13

65

53

206

93

650

133

2 060

173

6 500

213

20 600

253

65 000

14

67

54

212

94

670

134

2 120

174

6 700

214

21 200

254

67 000

15

69

55

218

95

690

135

2 180

175

6 900

215

21 800

255

69 000

16

71

56

224

96

710

136

2 240

176

7 100

216

22 400

256

71 000

17

73

57

230

97

730

137

2 300

177

7 300

217

23 000

257

73 000

18

75

58

236

98

750

138

2 360

178

7 500

218

23 600

258

75 000

19

77,5

59

243

99

775

139

2 430

179

7 750

219

24 300

259

77 500

20

80

60

250

100

800

140

2 500

180

8 000

220

25 000

260

80 000

21

82,5

61

257

101

825

141

2 575

181

8 250

221

25 750

261

82 500

22

85

62

265

102

850

142

2 650

182

8 500

222

26 500

262

85 000

23

87,5

63

272

103

875

143

2 725

183

8 750

223

27 250

263

87 500

24

90

64

280

104

900

144

2 800

184

9 000

224

28 000

264

90 000

25

92,5

65

290

105

925

145

2 900

185

9 250

225

29 000

265

92 500

26

95

66

300

106

950

146

3 000

186

9 500

226

30 000

266

95 000

27

97,5

67

307

107

975

147

3 075

187

9 750

227

30 750

267

97 500

28

100

68

315

108

1 000

148

3 150

188

10 000

228

31 500

268

100 000

29

103

69

325

109

1 030

149

3 250

189

10 300

229

32 500

269

103 000

30

106

70

335

110

1 060

150

3 350

190

10 600

230

33 500

270

106 000

31

109

71

345

111

1 090

151

3 450

191

10 900

231

34 500

271

109 000

32

112

72

355

112

1 120

152

3 550

192

11 200

232

35 500

272

112 000

33

115

73

365

113

1 150

153

3 650

193

11 500

233

36 500

273

115 000

34

118

74

375

114

1 180

154

3 750

194

11 800

234

37 500

274

118 000

35

121

75

387

115

1 215

155

3 875

195

12 150

235

38 750

275

121 500

36

125

76

400

116

1 250

156

4 000

196

12 500

236

40 000

276

125 000

37

128

77

412

117

1 285

157

4 125

197

12 850

237

41 250

277

128 500

38

132

78

425

118

1 320

158

4 250

198

13 200

238

42 500

278

132 000

39

136

79

437

119

1 360

159

4 375

199

13 600

239

43 750

279

136 000

ANNEX 5

TYRE SIZE DESIGNATION AND DIMENSIONS

(in accordance with ECE Regulation No 30)

For this information refer to Annex 5 of ECE Regulation No 30

ANNEX 6

METHOD OF MEASURING PNEUMATIC TYRES

| 1. | Preparing the tyre |
| --- | --- |

1.

Preparing the tyre

| 1.1. | The tyre shall be mounted on the test rim specified by the retreader and inflated to the pressure of 3 to 3,5 bar. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

The tyre shall be mounted on the test rim specified by the retreader and inflated to the pressure of 3 to 3,5 bar.

| 1.2. | The tyre pressure shall be adjusted as follows: |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

The tyre pressure shall be adjusted as follows:

| 1.2.1. | for standard bias belted tyres — to 1,7 bar; |
| --- | --- |

1.2.1.

for standard bias belted tyres — to 1,7 bar;

| 1.2.2 | for diagonal (bias ply) tyres — to: | Pressure (bar) for Speed symbol |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Ply rating | L, M, N | P, Q, R, S | T, U, H, V |
| 4 | 1,7 | 2,0 | — |
| 6 | 2,1 | 2,4 | 2,6 |
| 8 | 2,5 | 2,8 | 3,0 |

1.2.2

for diagonal (bias ply) tyres — to:

Pressure (bar) for Speed symbol

Ply rating

L, M, N

P, Q, R, S

T, U, H, V

4

1,7

2,0

—

6

2,1

2,4

2,6

8

2,5

2,8

3,0

| 1.2.3. | for standard radial tyres — to 1,8 bar; |
| --- | --- |

1.2.3.

for standard radial tyres — to 1,8 bar;

| 1.2.4. | for reinforced tyres — to 2,3 bar. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.4.

for reinforced tyres — to 2,3 bar.

| 2. | Measuring procedure |
| --- | --- |

2.

Measuring procedure

| 2.1. | The tyre, mounted on its rim, shall be conditioned at the ambient room temperature for not less than 24 hr, save as otherwise required by paragraph 6.8.3 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

The tyre, mounted on its rim, shall be conditioned at the ambient room temperature for not less than 24 hr, save as otherwise required by paragraph 6.8.3 of this Regulation.

| 2.2. | The tyre pressure shall be readjusted to the level specified in paragraph 1.2 of this Annex. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

The tyre pressure shall be readjusted to the level specified in paragraph 1.2 of this Annex.

| 2.3. | The overall width shall be measured at six equally spaced points around the tyre, taking account of the thickness of any protective ribs or bands. The highest reading obtained shall be taken as the overall width. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

The overall width shall be measured at six equally spaced points around the tyre, taking account of the thickness of any protective ribs or bands. The highest reading obtained shall be taken as the overall width.

| 2.4. | The outer diameter shall be calculated from a measurement of the maximum circumference of the inflated tyre. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

The outer diameter shall be calculated from a measurement of the maximum circumference of the inflated tyre.

ANNEX 7

PROCEDURE FOR LOAD/SPEED ENDURANCE TESTS

(in principle in accordance with Annex 7 of Regulation No 30)

| 1. | Preparing the tyre |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 1.1. | Mount a retreaded tyre on the test rim specified by the retreader. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Mount a retreaded tyre on the test rim specified by the retreader.

| 1.2. | Inflate the tyre to the appropriate pressure as given (in bar) in the table below:











  Speed category | Diagonal (bias-ply) tyres | Radial tyres | Bias-belted tyres |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Ply-rating | Standard | Reinforced | Standard |
| 4 | 6 | 8 |
| L, M, N | 2,3 | 2,7 | 3,0 | 2,4 | — | — |
| P, Q, R, S | 2,6 | 3,0 | 3,3 | 2,6 | 3,0 | 2,6 |
| T, U, H | 2,8 | 3,2 | 3,5 | 2,8 | 3,2 | 2,8 |
| V | 3,0 | 3,4 | 3,7 | 3,0 | 3,4 | — |
| W and Y | — | — | — | 3,2 | 3,6 | — |

1.2.

Inflate the tyre to the appropriate pressure as given (in bar) in the table below:

Speed category

Diagonal (bias-ply) tyres

Radial tyres

Bias-belted tyres

Ply-rating

Standard

Reinforced

Standard

4

6

8

L, M, N

2,3

2,7

3,0

2,4

—

—

P, Q, R, S

2,6

3,0

3,3

2,6

3,0

2,6

T, U, H

2,8

3,2

3,5

2,8

3,2

2,8

V

3,0

3,4

3,7

3,0

3,4

—

W and Y

—

—

—

3,2

3,6

—

| 1.3. | The retreading production unit may request, giving reasons, the use of a test inflation pressure different from those given in paragraph 1.2 of this Annex. In this case the tyre shall be inflated to the requested pressure. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

The retreading production unit may request, giving reasons, the use of a test inflation pressure different from those given in paragraph 1.2 of this Annex. In this case the tyre shall be inflated to the requested pressure.

| 1.4. | Condition the tyre and wheel assembly at test-room temperature for not less than three hours. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Condition the tyre and wheel assembly at test-room temperature for not less than three hours.

| 1.5. | Readjust the tyre pressure to that specified in paragraph 1.2 or 1.3 of this Annex. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Readjust the tyre pressure to that specified in paragraph 1.2 or 1.3 of this Annex.

| 2. | Test procedure |
| --- | --- |

2.

Test procedure

| 2.1. | Mount the tyre and wheel assembly on a test axle and press it against the outer face of a smooth surfaced power driven test drum either 1,70 m ± 1 % or 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

Mount the tyre and wheel assembly on a test axle and press it against the outer face of a smooth surfaced power driven test drum either 1,70 m ± 1 % or 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter.

| 2.2. | Apply to the test axle a load equal to 80 % of: |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

Apply to the test axle a load equal to 80 % of:

| 2.2.1. | the maximum load rating corresponding to the load index for tyres with speed symbols L to H inclusive, |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

the maximum load rating corresponding to the load index for tyres with speed symbols L to H inclusive,

| 2.2.2. | the maximum load rating associated with a maximum speed (see paragraph 2.35.2 of this Regulation) of:






  — | 240 km/h in the case of tyres of Speed symbol “V”, |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.2.2.

the maximum load rating associated with a maximum speed (see paragraph 2.35.2 of this Regulation) of:

—

240 km/h in the case of tyres of Speed symbol “V”,

| — | 270 km/h in the case of tyres of Speed symbol “W”, |
| --- | --- |

—

270 km/h in the case of tyres of Speed symbol “W”,

| — | 300 km/h in the case of tyres of Speed symbol “Y”. |
| --- | --- |

—

300 km/h in the case of tyres of Speed symbol “Y”.

| 2.3. | Throughout the test the tyre pressure must not be corrected and the test load must be kept constant. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

Throughout the test the tyre pressure must not be corrected and the test load must be kept constant.

| 2.4. | During the test the temperature in the test-room must be maintained at between 20 and 30 oC unless the tyre manufacturer or retreader agrees to a higher temperature. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

During the test the temperature in the test-room must be maintained at between 20 and 30 oC unless the tyre manufacturer or retreader agrees to a higher temperature.

| 2.5. | The endurance test programme shall be carried out without interruption and shall be as follows: |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

The endurance test programme shall be carried out without interruption and shall be as follows:

| 2.5.1. | time taken from zero speed to initial test speed: 10 minutes; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.1.

time taken from zero speed to initial test speed: 10 minutes;

| 2.5.2. | initial test speed: prescribed maximum speed for the tyre concerned, less 40 km/h in the case of a test drum of 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter or less 30 km/h in the case of a test drum of 2,00m ± 1 % diameter; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.2.

initial test speed: prescribed maximum speed for the tyre concerned, less 40 km/h in the case of a test drum of 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter or less 30 km/h in the case of a test drum of 2,00m ± 1 % diameter;

| 2.5.3. | successive speed increments: 10 km/h up to the maximum test speed; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.3.

successive speed increments: 10 km/h up to the maximum test speed;

| 2.5.4. | duration of test at each speed step except the last: 10 minutes; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.4.

duration of test at each speed step except the last: 10 minutes;

| 2.5.5. | duration of test at last speed step: 20 minutes; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.5.

duration of test at last speed step: 20 minutes;

| 2.5.6. | maximum test speed: prescribed maximum speed for the tyre concerned, less 10 km/h in the case of a test drum of 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter or the prescribed maximum speed in the case of a test drum of 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.6.

maximum test speed: prescribed maximum speed for the tyre concerned, less 10 km/h in the case of a test drum of 1,70 m ± 1 % diameter or the prescribed maximum speed in the case of a test drum of 2,00 m ± 1 % diameter.

| 3. | Equivalent test methods
  If a method other than that described in paragraph 2 of this Annex is used, its equivalence must be demonstrated. |
| --- | --- |

3.

Equivalent test methods

If a method other than that described in paragraph 2 of this Annex is used, its equivalence must be demonstrated.

ANNEX 8

EXPLANATORY FIGURE

See paragraph 2 of this Regulation

Image

---

(1)  The tyre standards can be obtained from the following addresses:

1

(2)  ETRTO, 32 Av. Brugmann — Bte 2, B-1060 Brussels, Belgium

2

(3)  TRA, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio, 44321 USA

3

(4)  JATMA, 9th Floor, Toranomon Building No 1-12, 1-Chome Toranomon Minato‐ku, Tokyo 105, Japan

4

(5)  TRAA, Suite 1, Hawthorn House, 795 Glenferrie Road, Hawthorn, Victoria, 3122 Australia

5

(6)  ALAPA, Avenida Paulista 2444-12o Andar, conj. 124, 01310 Sao Paulo, SP Brazil

6

o

(7)  STRO, Älggatan 48 A, Nb, S-216 15 Malmö, Sweden

7

(8)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Yugoslavia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32-36 (vacant), 37 for Turkey, 38-39 (vacant), 40 for The Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol) and 43 for Japan. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned to other countries in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary‐General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

8

---

| 4.7.2006 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 181/53 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

4.7.2006

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 181/53

---

Council Decision

of 13 March 2006

on the accession of the Community to United Nations Economic Commission for Europe Regulation No 55 on provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles

(Text with EEA relevance)

(2006/444/EC)

THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community,

Having regard to Council Decision 97/836/EC of 27 November 1997 with a view to accession by the European Community to the Agreement of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe concerning the adoption of uniform technical prescriptions for wheeled vehicles, equipment and parts which can be fitted to and/or be used on wheeled vehicles and the conditions for reciprocal recognition of approvals granted on the basis of these prescriptions (Revised 1958 Agreement) (1), and in particular Article 3(3) and the second indent of Article 4(2), thereof,

Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,

Having regard to the assent of the European Parliament (2),

Whereas:

| (1) | The standardised requirements of Regulation No 55 (3) on provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles are intended to remove technical barriers to the trade in motor vehicles between the Contracting Parties and to ensure a high level of safety and protection in the operation of vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

(1)

The standardised requirements of Regulation No 55 (3) on provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles are intended to remove technical barriers to the trade in motor vehicles between the Contracting Parties and to ensure a high level of safety and protection in the operation of vehicles.

| (2) | Regulation No 55 was not included in Annex II of Decision 97/836/EC as it did not comport with Community technical requirements and specifications at the time of Community accession to the Revised 1958 Agreement. |
| --- | --- |

(2)

Regulation No 55 was not included in Annex II of Decision 97/836/EC as it did not comport with Community technical requirements and specifications at the time of Community accession to the Revised 1958 Agreement.

| (3) | In light of subsequent amendments, Regulation No 55 should be incorporated into the Community system for the type approval of motor vehicles, |
| --- | --- |

(3)

In light of subsequent amendments, Regulation No 55 should be incorporated into the Community system for the type approval of motor vehicles,

HAS DECIDED AS FOLLOWS:

Article 1

1.   The Community shall apply Regulation No 55 of the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe on provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles.

2.   The text of the Regulation is attached to this Decision.

Article 2

Regulation No 55 shall be incorporated into the Community type‐approval system for motor vehicles.

Article 3

The Commission shall notify the Secretary‐General of the United Nations of this Decision.

Done at Brussels, 13 March 2006.

For the Council

The President

M. BARTENSTEIN

---

(1)  OJ L 346, 17.12.1997, p. 78.

1

(2)  Not yet published in the Official Journal.

2

(3)  UN Document E/ECE/324, E/ECE/TRANS/505, Rev. 1/Add. 54/Rev. 1, and Corrigendum No 1.

3

---

AGREEMENT

Concerning the adoption of uniform technical prescriptions for wheeled vehicles, equipment and parts which can be fitted and/or be used on wheeled vehicles and the conditions for reciprocal recognition of approvals granted on the basis of these prescriptions (1)

(Revision 2, including the amendments which entered into force on 16 October 1995)

---

(1)  Former title of the Agreement.

---

Addendum 54:

REGULATION No 55

Revised version providing Revision 1 consolidated with Corrigendum 1 (1)

Uniform provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles

---

(1)  Corrigendum 1 to the 01 series of amendments, subject of depositary notification C.N.602.2002.TREATIES-1 dated 13 June 2002.

---

(Acts whose publication is obligatory)

Regulation No 55 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE).

Uniform provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles.

1.   SCOPE

| 1.1. | This Regulation lays down the requirements which mechanical coupling devices and components shall meet in order to be regarded internationally as being mutually compatible. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

This Regulation lays down the requirements which mechanical coupling devices and components shall meet in order to be regarded internationally as being mutually compatible.

| 1.2. | This Regulation applies to devices and components intended for: |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

This Regulation applies to devices and components intended for:

| 1.2.1. | motor vehicles and trailers intended to form a combination of vehicles (1); |
| --- | --- |

1.2.1.

motor vehicles and trailers intended to form a combination of vehicles (1);

| 1.2.2. | motor vehicles and trailers intended to form articulated vehicles (1), where the vertical load imposed on the motor vehicle by the trailer does not exceed 200 kN. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.2.

motor vehicles and trailers intended to form articulated vehicles (1), where the vertical load imposed on the motor vehicle by the trailer does not exceed 200 kN.

| 1.3. | This Regulation applies to: |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

This Regulation applies to:

| 1.3.1. | standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.3.; |
| --- | --- |

1.3.1.

standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.3.;

| 1.3.2. | non-standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.4.; |
| --- | --- |

1.3.2.

non-standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.4.;

| 1.3.3. | non-standard miscellaneous devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.5. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.3.

non-standard miscellaneous devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.5.

2.   DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this Regulation:

| 2.1. | “mechanical coupling devices and components means” all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

“mechanical coupling devices and components means” all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.

| 2.2. | automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
  In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.

In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.

| 2.3. | standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer.

| 2.4. | non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.

| 2.5. | non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.

| 2.6. | mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows: |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:

| 2.6.1. | Class A | Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.1.

Class A

Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1.

| 2.6.1.1. | Class A50-1 to 50-5 | Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.1.1.

Class A50-1 to 50-5

Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.

| 2.6.1.2. | Class A50-X | Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.1.2.

Class A50-X

Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.

| 2.6.2. | Class B | Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.2.

Class B

Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2.

| 2.6.2.1. | Class B50-X | Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.2.1.

Class B50-X

Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.

| 2.6.3. | Class C | Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.3.

Class C

Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3.

| 2.6.3.1. | Class C50-1 to 50-7 | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.3.1.

Class C50-1 to 50-7

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.

| 2.6.3.2. | Class C50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.3.2.

Class C50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.

| 2.6.4. | Class D | Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.

Class D

Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.

| 2.6.4.1. | Class D50-A | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.1.

Class D50-A

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.

| 2.6.4.2. | Class D50-B | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.2.

Class D50-B

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.

| 2.6.4.3. | Class D50-C& 50-D | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.3.

Class D50-C& 50-D

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.

| 2.6.4.4. | Class D50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.4.

Class D50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.

| 2.6.5. | Class E | Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| | Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted. |
| | Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked. |
| | This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle. |

2.6.5.

Class E

Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5.

Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.

Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.

This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.

| 2.6.6. | Class F | Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.6.

Class F

Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6.

| 2.6.7. | Class G | Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.7.

Class G

Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7.

| 2.6.7.1. | Class G50 | Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.7.1.

Class G50

Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.

| 2.6.7.2. | Class G50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.7.2.

Class G50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.

| 2.6.8. | Class H | Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.8.

Class H

Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8.

| 2.6.8.1. | Class H50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.8.1.

Class H50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.

| 2.6.9. | Class J | Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.9.

Class J

Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9.

| 2.6.10. | Class K | Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.10.

Class K

Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10.

| 2.6.11. | Class L | Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.11.

Class L

Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.

| 2.6.12. | Class S | Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.12.

Class S

Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.

| 2.6.13. | Class T | Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.13.

Class T

Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.

| 2.7. | Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling.

| 2.8. | Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.

| 2.9. | Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged.

| 2.10. | “type of coupling device or component” means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as: |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

“type of coupling device or component” means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:

| 2.10.1. | the manufacturer's or supplier's trade name or mark; |
| --- | --- |

2.10.1.

the manufacturer's or supplier's trade name or mark;

| 2.10.2. | the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6.; |
| --- | --- |

2.10.2.

the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6.;

| 2.10.3. | the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and |
| --- | --- |

2.10.3.

the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and

| 2.10.4. | the characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.4.

the characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.

| 2.11. | The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as: |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:

| 2.11.1. | The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests. For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is:
  D = g ((T · R)/(T + R)) kN
  For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is:
  Dc = g ((T · C)/(T + C)) kN
  For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6., the value is:
  D = g ((0,6 · T ·R)/(T + R-U)) kN
  where:






  T | is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer. (2) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R | is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. (2) |
| C | is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (2). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers (3) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle. |
| g | is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s2 |
| U | is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2. |
| S | is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3. |

2.11.1.

The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests. For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is:

D = g ((T · R)/(T + R)) kN

For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is:

Dc = g ((T · C)/(T + C)) kN

For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6., the value is:

D = g ((0,6 · T ·R)/(T + R-U)) kN

where:

T

is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer. (2)

R

is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. (2)

C

is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (2). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers (3) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.

g

is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s2

U

is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.

S

is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.

| 2.11.2. | The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass (2) |
| --- | --- |

2.11.2.

The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass (2)

| 2.11.3. | The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass (2) |
| --- | --- |

2.11.3.

The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass (2)

| 2.11.4. | The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests.

  V = (a · C · X2) / L2
  (See the Note below)
  where:






  a | is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.11.4.

The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests.

V = (a · C · X2) / L2
  (See the Note below)

where:

a

is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)

a = 1n8 m/s2

For other types of suspension:

a = 2n4 m/s2

| X | is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1) |
| --- | --- |

X

is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)

| L | is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1) |
| --- | --- |

L

is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)

Note: (X2 / L2) ≥ 1,0

(If less than 1,0, the value of 1,0 shall be used)

Figure 1

Dimensions of the centre axle trailer

Image

| 2.12. | Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.






  Av | = | maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes. |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| C | = | mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| D | = | D value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| Dc | = | Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| R | = | mass of towed vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| T | = | mass of towing vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| Fa | = | static lifting force in kN. |
| Fh | = | horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN. |
| Fs | = | vertical component of test force in kN. |
| S | = | static vertical mass in kg. |
| U | = | fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes. |
| V | = | V-value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation. |
| a | = | equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation. |
| e | = | longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm. |
| f | = | vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm. |
| g | = | acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9,81 m/s2. |
| L | = | theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in metres. |
| X | = | length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in metres. |
| Subscripts: |
| O | = | maximum test force |
| U | = | minimum test force |
| a | = | static force |
| h | = | horizontal |
| p | = | pulsating |
| res | = | resultant |
| s | = | vertical |
| w | = | alternating force |

2.12.

Av

=

maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.

C

=

mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

D

=

D value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

Dc

=

Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

R

=

mass of towed vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

T

=

mass of towing vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

Fa

=

static lifting force in kN.

Fh

=

horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.

Fs

=

vertical component of test force in kN.

S

=

static vertical mass in kg.

U

=

fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.

V

=

V-value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.

a

=

equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.

e

=

longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.

f

=

vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.

g

=

acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9,81 m/s2.

L

=

theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in metres.

X

=

length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in metres.

Subscripts:

O

=

maximum test force

U

=

minimum test force

a

=

static force

h

=

horizontal

p

=

pulsating

res

=

resultant

s

=

vertical

w

=

alternating force

| 2.13. | “Centre axle trailer” means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 % of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser. The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (4). |
| --- | --- |

2.13.

“Centre axle trailer” means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 % of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser. The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (4).

| 2.14. | “Positive mechanical engagement” means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.

“Positive mechanical engagement” means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.

| 2.15. | “Vehicle type” means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the structure, dimensions, shape and materials in areas to which the mechanical coupling device or component is affixed. This applies to both the towing vehicle and trailer. |
| --- | --- |

2.15.

“Vehicle type” means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the structure, dimensions, shape and materials in areas to which the mechanical coupling device or component is affixed. This applies to both the towing vehicle and trailer.

3.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL OF A MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT

| 3.1. | The application for approval shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or mark or by his duly accredited representative. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

The application for approval shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or mark or by his duly accredited representative.

| 3.2. | For each type of mechanical coupling device or component the application shall be accompanied by the following information, for example, by means of the Communication form given in annex 1: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

For each type of mechanical coupling device or component the application shall be accompanied by the following information, for example, by means of the Communication form given in annex 1:

| 3.2.1. | details of all manufacturer's or supplier's trade names or marks to be applied to the coupling device or component; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

details of all manufacturer's or supplier's trade names or marks to be applied to the coupling device or component;

| 3.2.2. | three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to define the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to define the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.;

| 3.2.3. | a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.
  For Class A towing brackets a statement of the maximum permissible towing vehicle and trailer masses and the maximum permissible static vertical imposed load on the tow ball as advised by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.

For Class A towing brackets a statement of the maximum permissible towing vehicle and trailer masses and the maximum permissible static vertical imposed load on the tow ball as advised by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle;

| 3.2.3.1. | The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.1.

The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses.

| 3.2.4. | a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used;

| 3.2.5. | restrictions on the vehicles to which the coupling may be fitted — see annex 1, paragraph 12 and annex 5, paragraph 3.4.; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

restrictions on the vehicles to which the coupling may be fitted — see annex 1, paragraph 12 and annex 5, paragraph 3.4.;

| 3.2.6. | one sample, plus additional samples as requested by the type approval authority or technical service; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.

one sample, plus additional samples as requested by the type approval authority or technical service;

| 3.2.7. | all samples shall be fully finished with the final surface treatment applied. However, if the final treatment is by painting or epoxy powder coating, this should be omitted; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.

all samples shall be fully finished with the final surface treatment applied. However, if the final treatment is by painting or epoxy powder coating, this should be omitted;

| 3.2.8. | in the case of a mechanical coupling device or component designed for a specific vehicle type, the manufacturer of the device or component shall also submit the installation data given by the vehicle manufacturer. The approval authority or technical service may also request that a vehicle representative of the type be submitted. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.

in the case of a mechanical coupling device or component designed for a specific vehicle type, the manufacturer of the device or component shall also submit the installation data given by the vehicle manufacturer. The approval authority or technical service may also request that a vehicle representative of the type be submitted.

4.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICES OR COMPONENTS

| 4.1. | Each sample shall conform to the dimensional and strength specifications set out in annexes 5 and 6. Following the tests specified in annex 6 there shall not be any cracks, fractures or any excessive permanent distortion which would be detrimental to the satisfactory operation of the device or component. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

Each sample shall conform to the dimensional and strength specifications set out in annexes 5 and 6. Following the tests specified in annex 6 there shall not be any cracks, fractures or any excessive permanent distortion which would be detrimental to the satisfactory operation of the device or component.

| 4.2. | All parts of the mechanical coupling device or component whose failure could result in separation of the vehicle and trailer shall be made of steel. Other materials may be used provided that equivalence has been demonstrated by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service of the Contracting Party applying this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

All parts of the mechanical coupling device or component whose failure could result in separation of the vehicle and trailer shall be made of steel. Other materials may be used provided that equivalence has been demonstrated by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service of the Contracting Party applying this Regulation.

| 4.3. | The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be safe to operate and coupling and uncoupling shall be possible by one person without the use of tools. With the exception of Class T couplings only devices which allow automatic coupling shall be allowed for the coupling of trailers having a maximum technically permissible mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be safe to operate and coupling and uncoupling shall be possible by one person without the use of tools. With the exception of Class T couplings only devices which allow automatic coupling shall be allowed for the coupling of trailers having a maximum technically permissible mass greater than 3,5 tonnes.

| 4.4. | The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed and manufactured such that in normal use and with correct maintenance and replacement of wearing parts they will continue to function satisfactorily and retain the characteristics prescribed by this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed and manufactured such that in normal use and with correct maintenance and replacement of wearing parts they will continue to function satisfactorily and retain the characteristics prescribed by this Regulation.

| 4.5. | All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and the closed position shall be locked at least once by further positive mechanical engagement unless further requirements are stated in annex 5. Alternatively there may be two or more separate arrangements to ensure the integrity of the device but each arrangement shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and shall be tested individually to any requirements given in annex 6. Positive mechanical engagement shall be as defined in paragraph 2.14.
  Spring forces may be used only to close the device and to prevent the effects of vibration from causing component parts of the device to move to positions where it may open or disengage.
  The failure or omission of any one single spring shall not allow the complete device to open or disengage. |
| --- | --- |

4.5.

All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and the closed position shall be locked at least once by further positive mechanical engagement unless further requirements are stated in annex 5. Alternatively there may be two or more separate arrangements to ensure the integrity of the device but each arrangement shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and shall be tested individually to any requirements given in annex 6. Positive mechanical engagement shall be as defined in paragraph 2.14.

Spring forces may be used only to close the device and to prevent the effects of vibration from causing component parts of the device to move to positions where it may open or disengage.

The failure or omission of any one single spring shall not allow the complete device to open or disengage.

| 4.6. | Every device or component shall be accompanied by installation and operating instructions giving sufficient information for any competent person to install it correctly on the vehicle and operate it properly — see also annex 7. The instructions shall be in at least the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale. In the case of devices and components supplied for original equipment fitting by a vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder, installation instructions may be dispensed with but the vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder will be responsible for ensuring that the vehicle operator is supplied with the necessary instructions for correct operation of the coupling device or component. |
| --- | --- |

4.6.

Every device or component shall be accompanied by installation and operating instructions giving sufficient information for any competent person to install it correctly on the vehicle and operate it properly — see also annex 7. The instructions shall be in at least the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale. In the case of devices and components supplied for original equipment fitting by a vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder, installation instructions may be dispensed with but the vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder will be responsible for ensuring that the vehicle operator is supplied with the necessary instructions for correct operation of the coupling device or component.

| 4.7. | For devices and components of Class A, or Class S, if applicable, for use with trailers of maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3,5 tonnes, and which are produced by manufacturers not having any association with the vehicle manufacturer and where the devices and components are intended for fitting in the after-market, the height and other installation features of the coupling shall, in all cases, be verified by the type approval authority or technical service in accordance with annex 7, paragraph 1. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.

For devices and components of Class A, or Class S, if applicable, for use with trailers of maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3,5 tonnes, and which are produced by manufacturers not having any association with the vehicle manufacturer and where the devices and components are intended for fitting in the after-market, the height and other installation features of the coupling shall, in all cases, be verified by the type approval authority or technical service in accordance with annex 7, paragraph 1.

| 4.8. | For heavy duty and other non-standard miscellaneous coupling devices or components, Class S and Class T, the relevant requirements in annexes 5, 6 and 7 for the closest standard or non-standard device or component shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

4.8.

For heavy duty and other non-standard miscellaneous coupling devices or components, Class S and Class T, the relevant requirements in annexes 5, 6 and 7 for the closest standard or non-standard device or component shall be used.

5.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE FITTED WITH A MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT

| 5.1. | Where a vehicle manufacturer applies for approval of a vehicle fitted with a mechanical coupling device or component or authorises the use of a vehicle for towing any form of trailer, then, at the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, or of the type approval authority or technical service of a Contracting Party, the vehicle manufacturer shall readily make available to that inquirer or authority or technical service, such information as required in paragraph 5.3. below, to enable a manufacturer of a coupling device or component to properly design and manufacture a mechanical coupling device or component for that vehicle. At the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, any information given in paragraph 5.3. below which is held by the type approval authority shall be released to that applicant. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

Where a vehicle manufacturer applies for approval of a vehicle fitted with a mechanical coupling device or component or authorises the use of a vehicle for towing any form of trailer, then, at the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, or of the type approval authority or technical service of a Contracting Party, the vehicle manufacturer shall readily make available to that inquirer or authority or technical service, such information as required in paragraph 5.3. below, to enable a manufacturer of a coupling device or component to properly design and manufacture a mechanical coupling device or component for that vehicle. At the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, any information given in paragraph 5.3. below which is held by the type approval authority shall be released to that applicant.

| 5.2. | The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the fitting of a mechanical coupling device or component shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the fitting of a mechanical coupling device or component shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative.

| 5.3. | It shall be accompanied by the following information to enable the type approval authority to complete the communication form given in annex 2. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

It shall be accompanied by the following information to enable the type approval authority to complete the communication form given in annex 2.

| 5.3.1. | a detailed description of the vehicle type and of the mechanical coupling device or component and, at the request of the type approval authority or technical service, a copy of the approval form for the device or component; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.1.

a detailed description of the vehicle type and of the mechanical coupling device or component and, at the request of the type approval authority or technical service, a copy of the approval form for the device or component;

| 5.3.2. | The information shall also include the maximum permissible masses of the towing and towed vehicles, the distribution of the maximum permissible mass of the towing vehicle between the axles, the maximum permissible axle masses, the maximum permissible vertical loading to be imposed on the rear of the towing vehicle and details and/or drawings of the installation mounting points for the device or component and of any additional reinforcing plates, support brackets and so on, necessary for safe attachment of the mechanical coupling device or component to the towing vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.

The information shall also include the maximum permissible masses of the towing and towed vehicles, the distribution of the maximum permissible mass of the towing vehicle between the axles, the maximum permissible axle masses, the maximum permissible vertical loading to be imposed on the rear of the towing vehicle and details and/or drawings of the installation mounting points for the device or component and of any additional reinforcing plates, support brackets and so on, necessary for safe attachment of the mechanical coupling device or component to the towing vehicle;

| 5.3.2.1. | the loading condition at which the height of the tow ball of M1 category vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.1.

the loading condition at which the height of the tow ball of M1 category vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1.

| 5.3.3. | three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to identify the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.3.

three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to identify the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.;

| 5.3.4. | a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.

a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used;

| 5.3.5. | a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.5.

a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.;

| 5.3.5.1. | The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.5.1.

The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses.

| 5.3.6. | a vehicle, representative of the type to be approved and fitted with a mechanical coupling device, shall be submitted to the type approval authority or technical service which may also request additional samples of the device or component; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.6.

a vehicle, representative of the type to be approved and fitted with a mechanical coupling device, shall be submitted to the type approval authority or technical service which may also request additional samples of the device or component;

| 5.3.7. | a vehicle not having all of the components appropriate to the type may be accepted provided that the applicant can show, to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service, that the absence of the components does not have any effect on the results of the inspection as far as the requirements of this Regulation are concerned. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.7.

a vehicle not having all of the components appropriate to the type may be accepted provided that the applicant can show, to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service, that the absence of the components does not have any effect on the results of the inspection as far as the requirements of this Regulation are concerned.

6.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VEHICLES FITTED WITH A MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT

| 6.1. | The mechanical coupling device or component fitted to the vehicle shall be approved in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs 3 and 4 and annexes 5 and 6 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

The mechanical coupling device or component fitted to the vehicle shall be approved in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs 3 and 4 and annexes 5 and 6 of this Regulation.

| 6.2. | The installation of the mechanical coupling device or component shall meet the requirements of annex 7 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

The installation of the mechanical coupling device or component shall meet the requirements of annex 7 to this Regulation.

| 6.3. | Operating instructions shall be provided for use of the coupling device or component which shall contain any special instructions for operations which are different from those normally associated with the type of coupling device or component and instructions for coupling and uncoupling with different modes of operation, for example, at various angles between the towing and towed vehicles. Each vehicle shall be accompanied by these operating instructions which shall be at least in the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

Operating instructions shall be provided for use of the coupling device or component which shall contain any special instructions for operations which are different from those normally associated with the type of coupling device or component and instructions for coupling and uncoupling with different modes of operation, for example, at various angles between the towing and towed vehicles. Each vehicle shall be accompanied by these operating instructions which shall be at least in the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale.

7.   MARKINGS

| 7.1. | Types of mechanical coupling devices and components submitted for approval shall bear the trade name or mark of the manufacturer, supplier or applicant. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Types of mechanical coupling devices and components submitted for approval shall bear the trade name or mark of the manufacturer, supplier or applicant.

| 7.2. | There shall be a sufficiently large space for application of the approval mark referred to in paragraph 8.5 and shown in annex 3. This space shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.

There shall be a sufficiently large space for application of the approval mark referred to in paragraph 8.5 and shown in annex 3. This space shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2.

| 7.3. | Adjacent to the approval mark referred to in paragraphs 7.2 and 8.5, the mechanical coupling device or component shall be marked with the class of coupling, as defined in paragraph 2.6 and the relevant characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 and shown in annex 4. The position for these markings shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2.
  The characteristic values need not be marked in cases where those values are defined in the classification given in this Regulation, for example, Classes A50-1 to A50-5. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.

Adjacent to the approval mark referred to in paragraphs 7.2 and 8.5, the mechanical coupling device or component shall be marked with the class of coupling, as defined in paragraph 2.6 and the relevant characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 and shown in annex 4. The position for these markings shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2.

The characteristic values need not be marked in cases where those values are defined in the classification given in this Regulation, for example, Classes A50-1 to A50-5.

| 7.4. | Where the mechanical coupling device or component is approved for alternative characteristic values within the same class of coupling or device, a maximum of two alternatives shall be marked on the device or component. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.

Where the mechanical coupling device or component is approved for alternative characteristic values within the same class of coupling or device, a maximum of two alternatives shall be marked on the device or component.

| 7.5. | If the application of the mechanical coupling device or component is restricted in any way, for example, if it is not to be used with steering wedges, then that restriction shall be marked on the device or component. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.

If the application of the mechanical coupling device or component is restricted in any way, for example, if it is not to be used with steering wedges, then that restriction shall be marked on the device or component.

| 7.6. | All markings shall be permanent and legible when the device or component is installed on the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.

All markings shall be permanent and legible when the device or component is installed on the vehicle.

8.   APPROVAL

| 8.1. | If the sample(s) of a type of mechanical coupling device or component meets (meet) the requirements of this Regulation, approval shall be granted subject to the requirements of paragraph 10 being satisfactorily met. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

If the sample(s) of a type of mechanical coupling device or component meets (meet) the requirements of this Regulation, approval shall be granted subject to the requirements of paragraph 10 being satisfactorily met.

| 8.2. | An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 01) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of device or component referred to in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 01) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of device or component referred to in this Regulation.

| 8.3. | Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued, relating to a type of mechanical coupling device or component approved pursuant to this Regulation, shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.

Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued, relating to a type of mechanical coupling device or component approved pursuant to this Regulation, shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation.

| 8.4. | In addition to the mark prescribed in paragraph 7.1., there shall be affixed to every mechanical coupling device or component approved under this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 7.2., an approval mark as described in paragraph 8.5. |
| --- | --- |

8.4.

In addition to the mark prescribed in paragraph 7.1., there shall be affixed to every mechanical coupling device or component approved under this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 7.2., an approval mark as described in paragraph 8.5.

| 8.5. | The approval mark shall be an international mark comprising: |
| --- | --- |

8.5.

The approval mark shall be an international mark comprising:

| 8.5.1. | a circle surrounding the letter “E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (5); |
| --- | --- |

8.5.1.

a circle surrounding the letter “E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (5);

| 8.5.2. | the approval number prescribed in paragraph 8.2.; |
| --- | --- |

8.5.2.

the approval number prescribed in paragraph 8.2.;

| 8.5.3. | the approval mark and number shall be arranged as shown in the example in annex 3. |
| --- | --- |

8.5.3.

the approval mark and number shall be arranged as shown in the example in annex 3.

9.   MODIFICATIONS OF THE MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT, OR OF THE VEHICLE AND EXTENSION OF APPROVAL

| 9.1. | Any modification to the type of mechanical coupling device or component, or of the vehicle as defined in paragraph 2.10 shall be notified to the type approval authority or technical service which granted the approval. The type approval authority or technical service may then either: |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

Any modification to the type of mechanical coupling device or component, or of the vehicle as defined in paragraph 2.10 shall be notified to the type approval authority or technical service which granted the approval. The type approval authority or technical service may then either:

| 9.1.1. | consider that the modifications are unlikely to have any appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the device, component or vehicle still conforms to requirements; or |
| --- | --- |

9.1.1.

consider that the modifications are unlikely to have any appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the device, component or vehicle still conforms to requirements; or

| 9.1.2. | require a further test report. |
| --- | --- |

9.1.2.

require a further test report.

| 9.2. | Confirmation of, or refusal of approval, specifying the modification, shall be communicated by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3 to the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

Confirmation of, or refusal of approval, specifying the modification, shall be communicated by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3 to the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation.

| 9.3. | The type approval authority or technical service issuing an extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and shall inform the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3. |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

The type approval authority or technical service issuing an extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and shall inform the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3.

10.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION PROCEDURES

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324 — E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 10.1. | The holder of the approval must ensure that results of the conformity of production tests are recorded and that the annexed documents remain available for a period determined in agreement with the approval authority or technical service. This period must not exceed 10 years counted from the time when production is definitely discontinued. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

The holder of the approval must ensure that results of the conformity of production tests are recorded and that the annexed documents remain available for a period determined in agreement with the approval authority or technical service. This period must not exceed 10 years counted from the time when production is definitely discontinued.

| 10.2. | The type approval authority or technical service which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every two years. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

The type approval authority or technical service which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every two years.

11.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 11.1. | The approval granted in respect of a type of mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a device or component bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved. |
| --- | --- |

11.1.

The approval granted in respect of a type of mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a device or component bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved.

| 11.2. | If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

11.2.

If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation.

12.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

If the holder of the approval completely ceases to manufacture a type of mechanical coupling device or component approved in accordance with this Regulation, he shall so inform the type approval authority or technical service which granted the approval. Upon receiving the relevant communication, that type approval authority or technical service shall inform thereof the other Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation.

13.   TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

Until the United Nations Secretary-General is notified otherwise, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation that are Member States of the European Community (at the time of adoption of the 01 series of amendments, Italy, Netherlands, Belgium, United Kingdom, Luxembourg, Finland and Greece) declare that, in relation to mechanical coupling devices and components, they will only be bound by the obligations of the Agreement to which this Regulation is annexed with respect to such devices and components intended for vehicles of categories other than M1.

14.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR APPROVAL TESTS AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

| 14.1. | The Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval, or production definitely discontinued, issued in other countries, are to be sent. |
| --- | --- |

14.1.

The Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval, or production definitely discontinued, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

---

(1)  Within the meaning of the Convention on Road Traffic (Vienna, 1968, Article 1, sub-paragraphs (t) and (u)).

(2)  The mass T and R and the technically permissible maximum mass, may be greater than the permissible maximum mass prescribed by national legislation.

(3)  See definitions in Regulation No 13 annexed to the 1958 Agreement concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions. The definition is also contained in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3) (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

(4)  The technically permissible mass may be greater than the maximum permissible mass prescribed by national legislation.

(5)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Yugoslavia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35-36 (vacant), 37 for Turkey, 38-39 (vacant), 40 for The former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia, 46 for Ukraine and 47 for South Africa. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, or in which they accede to the Agreement, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

ANNEX 1

COMMUNICATION

(maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

| | issued by: | Name of administration:
  .......................................
  .......................................
  ....................................... |
| --- | --- | --- |

Image

issued by:

Name of administration:

.......................................

.......................................

.......................................

| concerning: | APPROVAL GRANTED |
| --- | --- |
| | APPROVAL EXTENDED |
| | APPROVAL REFUSED |
| | APPROVAL WITHDRAWN |
| | PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED |

concerning:

APPROVAL GRANTED

APPROVAL EXTENDED

APPROVAL REFUSED

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a type of mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to Regulation No 55

Approval No .................. Extension No ..................

| 1. | name or mark of the device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

1.

name or mark of the device or component: ...

| 2. | Manufacturer's name for the type of device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

2.

Manufacturer's name for the type of device or component: ...

| 3. | Manufacturer's name and address: ... |
| --- | --- |

3.

Manufacturer's name and address: ...

| 4. | If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ... |
| --- | --- |

4.

If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ...

| 5. | Alternative supplier's names or trade marks applied to the device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

5.

Alternative supplier's names or trade marks applied to the device or component: ...

| 6. | Name and address of company or body taking responsibility for the conformity of production: ... |
| --- | --- |

6.

Name and address of company or body taking responsibility for the conformity of production: ...

| 7. | Submitted for approval on: ... |
| --- | --- |

7.

Submitted for approval on: ...

| 8. | Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ... |
| --- | --- |

8.

Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ...

| 9. | Brief description: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.

Brief description: ...

| 9.1. | Type and class of device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

Type and class of device or component: ...

| 9.2. | Characteristic values: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

Characteristic values: ...

| 9.2.1. | Primary values: ...
  D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ...tonnes V ... kN
  Alternative values:
  D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ...tonnes V ... kN |
| --- | --- |

9.2.1.

Primary values: ...

D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ...tonnes V ... kN

Alternative values:

D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ...tonnes V ... kN

| 9.3. | For Class A mechanical coupling devices or components, including towing brackets:
  Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg
  Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...
  Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg
  Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg.
  Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg
  Loading condition under which the tow ball height of a mechanical coupling device fitted to category M1 vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

For Class A mechanical coupling devices or components, including towing brackets:

Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg

Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...

Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg

Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg.

Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg

Loading condition under which the tow ball height of a mechanical coupling device fitted to category M1 vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1: ...

| 10. | Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points given by the vehicle manufacturer: ... |
| --- | --- |

10.

Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points given by the vehicle manufacturer: ...

| 11. | Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

11.

Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ...

| 12. | Additional information where the use of the coupling device or component is restricted to special types of vehicles — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4. ... |
| --- | --- |

12.

Additional information where the use of the coupling device or component is restricted to special types of vehicles — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4. ...

| 13. | For Class K hook type couplings, details of the drawbar eyes suitable for use with the particular hook type. ... |
| --- | --- |

13.

For Class K hook type couplings, details of the drawbar eyes suitable for use with the particular hook type. ...

| 14. | Date of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

14.

Date of test report: ...

| 15. | Number of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

15.

Number of test report: ...

| 16. | Approval mark position: ... |
| --- | --- |

16.

Approval mark position: ...

| 17. | Reason(s) for extension of approval: ... |
| --- | --- |

17.

Reason(s) for extension of approval: ...

| 18. | Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: 2/ |
| --- | --- |

18.

Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: 2/

| 19. | Place: ... |
| --- | --- |

19.

Place: ...

| 20. | Date: ... |
| --- | --- |

20.

Date: ...

| 21. | Signature: ... |
| --- | --- |

21.

Signature: ...

| 22. | The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.
  ...
  ... |
| --- | --- |

22.

The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.

...

...

ANNEX 2

COMMUNICATION

(maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

| | issued by: | Name of administration:
  .......................................
  .......................................
  ....................................... |
| --- | --- | --- |

Image

issued by:

Name of administration:

.......................................

.......................................

.......................................

| concerning: | APPROVAL GRANTED |
| --- | --- |
| | APPROVAL EXTENDED |
| | APPROVAL REFUSED |
| | APPROVAL WITHDRAWN |
| | PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED |

concerning:

APPROVAL GRANTED

APPROVAL EXTENDED

APPROVAL REFUSED

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a vehicle type with regard to the fitting of a mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to Regulation No 55

Approval No .................. Extension No ..................

| 1. | Trade name or mark of vehicle: ... |
| --- | --- |

1.

Trade name or mark of vehicle: ...

| 2. | Vehicle type: ... |
| --- | --- |

2.

Vehicle type: ...

| 3. | Manufacturer's name and address: ... |
| --- | --- |

3.

Manufacturer's name and address: ...

| 4. | If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ... |
| --- | --- |

4.

If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ...

| 5. | Vehicle category, for example, M1, N1: ... |
| --- | --- |

5.

Vehicle category, for example, M1, N1: ...

| 6. | Maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg
  Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...
  Maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg
  Maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg
  Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg |
| --- | --- |

6.

Maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg

Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...

Maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg

Maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg

Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg

| 7. | D ... kN Dc. ... kN S ... kg U ...tonnes V ... kN |
| --- | --- |

7.

D ... kN Dc. ... kN S ... kg U ...tonnes V ... kN

| 8. | Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points: ... |
| --- | --- |

8.

Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points: ...

| 9. | Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.

Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ...

| 10. | Trade name or mark of the mechanical coupling device or component and the approval number: ... |
| --- | --- |

10.

Trade name or mark of the mechanical coupling device or component and the approval number: ...

| 11. | Class of coupling device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

11.

Class of coupling device or component: ...

| 12. | Submitted for approval on: ... |
| --- | --- |

12.

Submitted for approval on: ...

| 13. | Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ... |
| --- | --- |

13.

Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ...

| 14. | Date of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

14.

Date of test report: ...

| 15. | Number of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

15.

Number of test report: ...

| 16. | Approval mark position: ... |
| --- | --- |

16.

Approval mark position: ...

| 17. | Reason(s) for extension of approval: ... |
| --- | --- |

17.

Reason(s) for extension of approval: ...

| 18. | Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: ... |
| --- | --- |

18.

Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: ...

| 19. | Place: ... |
| --- | --- |

19.

Place: ...

| 20. | Date: ... |
| --- | --- |

20.

Date: ...

| 21. | Signature: ... |
| --- | --- |

21.

Signature: ...

| 22. | The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.
  ...
  ... |
| --- | --- |

22.

The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.

...

...

ANNEX 3

EXAMPLE OF AN ARRANGEMENT OF THE APPROVAL MARK

Image

The mechanical coupling device or component or vehicle bearing the approval mark shown above is a device or component approved in the Netherlands (E4), under approval number 2439, meeting the requirements of the 01 series of amendments to this Regulation.

Note: The approval number and additional symbols shall be placed close to the circle and either above or below the letter “E” or to the right or left of that letter. The digits of the approval number shall be on the same side of the letter “E” and face in the same direction. The use of Roman numerals as approval numbers should be avoided so as to prevent any confusion with other symbols.

ANNEX 4

EXAMPLES OF ARRANGEMENTS OF MARKING OF THE CHARACTERISTIC VALUES

| 1. | All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be marked with the class of the device or component. In addition there shall be marking to indicate the capacity in terms of characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.

All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be marked with the class of the device or component. In addition there shall be marking to indicate the capacity in terms of characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 of this Regulation.

| 1.1. | The height of all letters and numbers shall be not less than those of the approval number, that is a/3 where a is 8 mm. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

The height of all letters and numbers shall be not less than those of the approval number, that is a/3 where a is 8 mm.

| 1.2. | The characteristic values applicable to each device or component which are to be marked are as shown in the table below — see also paragraph 7.3 of this Regulation:
  TABLE 1
  Relevant characteristics values to be marked on coupling devices or components











  Description of mechanical coupling device or component | Relevant characteristic values to be marked |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Class | D | Dc | S | U | V |
| Coupling balls and towing brackets — see annex 5, para. 1 of this Regulation | ★ | ★ | | ★ | | |
| Coupling heads | ★ | ★ | | ★ | | |
| Drawbar couplings | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Drawbar eyes | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Drawbars | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Drawbeams | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Fifth wheel couplings | ★ | ★ | | | ★ | |
| Fifth wheel pins | ★ | ★ | | | | |
| Fifth wheel mounting plates | ★ | ★ | | | ★ | |
| Hook type couplings | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |

1.2.

The characteristic values applicable to each device or component which are to be marked are as shown in the table below — see also paragraph 7.3 of this Regulation:

TABLE 1

Relevant characteristics values to be marked on coupling devices or components

Description of mechanical coupling device or component

Relevant characteristic values to be marked

Class

D

Dc

S

U

V

Coupling balls and towing brackets — see annex 5, para. 1 of this Regulation

★

★

★

Coupling heads

★

★

★

Drawbar couplings

★

★

★

★

★

Drawbar eyes

★

★

★

★

★

Drawbars

★

★

★

★

★

Drawbeams

★

★

★

★

★

Fifth wheel couplings

★

★

★

Fifth wheel pins

★

★

Fifth wheel mounting plates

★

★

★

Hook type couplings

★

★

★

★

★

| Examples: | C50—X D130 Dc90 S1000 V35 would identify a non‐standard drawbar coupling of Class C50—X with a maximum D value of 130 kN, a maximum permitted Dc value of 90 kN, a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 1 000 kg and a maximum permitted V value of 35 kN.
  A50—X D20 S120 would identify a standard towing bracket with ball coupling of Class A50—X with a maximum D value of 20 kN and a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 120 kg. |
| --- | --- |

Examples:

C50—X D130 Dc90 S1000 V35 would identify a non‐standard drawbar coupling of Class C50—X with a maximum D value of 130 kN, a maximum permitted Dc value of 90 kN, a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 1 000 kg and a maximum permitted V value of 35 kN.

A50—X D20 S120 would identify a standard towing bracket with ball coupling of Class A50—X with a maximum D value of 20 kN and a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 120 kg.

ANNEX 5

REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICES OR COMPONENTS

1.   COUPLING BALLS AND TOWING BRACKETS

The requirements stated in paragraphs 1.1 to 1.5 of this annex are applicable to all coupling balls and towing brackets of Class A. Paragraph 1.6 details additional requirements which must be fulfilled by standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixings.

| 1.1. | Coupling balls of Class A shall conform to Figure 2 in external shape and external dimensions. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Coupling balls of Class A shall conform to Figure 2 in external shape and external dimensions.

Figure 2

Coupling ball of Class A

Image

| 1.2. | The shape and dimensions of towing brackets shall meet the requirements of the vehicle manufacturer concerning the attachment points and additional mounting devices or components if necessary. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

The shape and dimensions of towing brackets shall meet the requirements of the vehicle manufacturer concerning the attachment points and additional mounting devices or components if necessary.

| 1.3. | Removable coupling balls: |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

Removable coupling balls:

| 1.3.1. | In the case of removable coupling balls or components which are not fixed by bolts, for example Class A50-X, the point of connection and the locking arrangement shall be designed for positive mechanical engagement. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.1.

In the case of removable coupling balls or components which are not fixed by bolts, for example Class A50-X, the point of connection and the locking arrangement shall be designed for positive mechanical engagement.

| 1.3.2. | In the case of a removable coupling ball or component which may be separately approved for use with a variety of towing brackets for different vehicle applications, for example Class A50-X, the clearance space when such a coupling ball is fitted to the towing bracket shall be that prescribed in annex 7, Figure 25. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.2.

In the case of a removable coupling ball or component which may be separately approved for use with a variety of towing brackets for different vehicle applications, for example Class A50-X, the clearance space when such a coupling ball is fitted to the towing bracket shall be that prescribed in annex 7, Figure 25.

| 1.4. | Coupling balls and towing devices shall be able to satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.1. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Coupling balls and towing devices shall be able to satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.1.

| 1.5. | Manufacturers of towing brackets shall incorporate attachment points to which either secondary couplings or devices necessary to enable the trailer to be stopped automatically in the event of separation of the main coupling, may be attached. This requirement is necessary to enable the vehicle to comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2.2.9 of UNECE Regulation No 13 — Uniform Provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with regard to braking. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Manufacturers of towing brackets shall incorporate attachment points to which either secondary couplings or devices necessary to enable the trailer to be stopped automatically in the event of separation of the main coupling, may be attached. This requirement is necessary to enable the vehicle to comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2.2.9 of UNECE Regulation No 13 — Uniform Provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with regard to braking.

| 1.5.1. | The attachment points for a secondary coupling and/or breakaway cable shall be positioned such that when in use, the secondary coupling or breakaway cable does not restrict the normal articulation of the coupling or interfere with the normal inertia braking system operation. A single attachment point shall be positioned within 100 mm of a vertical plane passing through the centre of articulation of the coupling. If this is not practicable, two attachment points shall be provided, one on each side of the vertical centre line and equidistant from the centre line by a maximum of 250 mm. The attachment point(s) shall be as rearward and as high as practicable. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.1.

The attachment points for a secondary coupling and/or breakaway cable shall be positioned such that when in use, the secondary coupling or breakaway cable does not restrict the normal articulation of the coupling or interfere with the normal inertia braking system operation. A single attachment point shall be positioned within 100 mm of a vertical plane passing through the centre of articulation of the coupling. If this is not practicable, two attachment points shall be provided, one on each side of the vertical centre line and equidistant from the centre line by a maximum of 250 mm. The attachment point(s) shall be as rearward and as high as practicable.

| 1.6. | Special requirements for standard coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of Classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive: |
| --- | --- |

1.6.

Special requirements for standard coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of Classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive:

| 1.6.1. | Dimensions of Class A50-1 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 3 and Table 2. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.1.

Dimensions of Class A50-1 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 3 and Table 2.

| 1.6.2. | Dimensions of Class A50-2, A50-3, A50-4 and A50-5 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 4 and Table 2. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.2.

Dimensions of Class A50-2, A50-3, A50-4 and A50-5 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 4 and Table 2.

| 1.6.3. | Coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of the classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive, shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 3. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.3.

Coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of the classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive, shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 3.

Figure 3

Dimensions of standard flange type ball couplings of Class A50-1

(see Table 2)

Image

Figure 4

Dimensions of standard flange type ball couplings of Class A50-2 to A50-5

(see Table 2)

Image

Table 2

Dimensions of standard flange type ball couplings (mm), see Figures 3 and 4.

| Class | A50-1 | A50-2, A50-4 | A50-3, A50-5 | Comments |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | 90 | 83 | 120 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | | 56 | 55 | ±0,5 |
| d2 | 17 | 10,5 | 15 | H13 |
| f | 130 | 110 | 155 | +6,0 -0 |
| g | 50 | 85 | 90 | +6,0 -0 |
| c | 15 | 15 | 15 | Maximum |
| l | 55 | 110 | 120 | ±5,0 |
| h | 70 | 80 | 80 | ±5,0 |

Class

A50-1

A50-2, A50-4

A50-3, A50-5

Comments

e1

90

83

120

±0,5

e2

56

55

±0,5

d2

17

10,5

15

H13

f

130

110

155

+6,0 -0

g

50

85

90

+6,0 -0

c

15

15

15

Maximum

l

55

110

120

±5,0

h

70

80

80

±5,0

Table 3

Characteristic values for standard flange type ball couplings

| Class | A50-1 | A50-2 | A50-3 | A50-3 | A50-5 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D | 17 | 20 | 30 | 20 | 30 |
| S | 120 | 120 | 120 | 150 | 150 |

Class

A50-1

A50-2

A50-3

A50-3

A50-5

D

17

20

30

20

30

S

120

120

120

150

150

| D | = | Maximum D value (kN) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| S | = | Maximum static mass (kg) |

D

=

Maximum D value (kN)

S

=

Maximum static mass (kg)

| 1.7. | Manufacturers of coupling balls and towing brackets intended for fitment in the after-market and which do not have any association with the relevant vehicle manufacturer shall be aware of the requirements for articulation of the coupling given in paragraph 2 of this annex and shall comply with the appropriate requirements in annex 7 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.7.

Manufacturers of coupling balls and towing brackets intended for fitment in the after-market and which do not have any association with the relevant vehicle manufacturer shall be aware of the requirements for articulation of the coupling given in paragraph 2 of this annex and shall comply with the appropriate requirements in annex 7 to this Regulation.

2.   COUPLING HEADS

| 2.1. | Coupling heads of Class B50 shall be designed so that they can be used safely with the coupling balls described in paragraph 1 of this annex and thereby retain the prescribed characteristics.
  Coupling heads shall be designed in such a way that safe coupling is ensured, also taking into account the wear of the coupling devices. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

Coupling heads of Class B50 shall be designed so that they can be used safely with the coupling balls described in paragraph 1 of this annex and thereby retain the prescribed characteristics.

Coupling heads shall be designed in such a way that safe coupling is ensured, also taking into account the wear of the coupling devices.

| 2.2. | Coupling heads shall be able to satisfy the tests laid down in annex 6, paragraph 3.2. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

Coupling heads shall be able to satisfy the tests laid down in annex 6, paragraph 3.2.

| 2.3. | Any additional device (e.g. braking, stabiliser, etc.) shall not have any adverse effect on the mechanical connection. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

Any additional device (e.g. braking, stabiliser, etc.) shall not have any adverse effect on the mechanical connection.

| 2.4. | When not attached to the vehicle, horizontal rotation of the coupling head shall be at least 90o to each side of the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting described in paragraph 1 of this annex. Simultaneously, there shall be an angle of free vertical movement 20o above and below the horizontal. Also, in conjunction with the horizontal angle of rotation of 90o it shall be possible for there to be 25o of roll in both directions about the horizontal axis. The following articulation shall be possible at all angles of horizontal rotation:






  (i) | vertical pitch ±15o with axial roll ±25o |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.4.

When not attached to the vehicle, horizontal rotation of the coupling head shall be at least 90o to each side of the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting described in paragraph 1 of this annex. Simultaneously, there shall be an angle of free vertical movement 20o above and below the horizontal. Also, in conjunction with the horizontal angle of rotation of 90o it shall be possible for there to be 25o of roll in both directions about the horizontal axis. The following articulation shall be possible at all angles of horizontal rotation:

(i)

vertical pitch ±15o with axial roll ±25o

| (ii) | axial roll ±10o with vertical pitch ±20o |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

axial roll ±10o with vertical pitch ±20o

3.   DRAWBAR COUPLINGS

The requirements of paragraphs 3.1 to 3.6 of this annex are applicable to all drawbar couplings of Class C50. Additional requirements which must be fulfilled by standard drawbar couplings of Classes C50-1 to C50-6 are given in paragraph 3.7.

| 3.1. | Performance requirements — All drawbar couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.3. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

Performance requirements — All drawbar couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.3.

| 3.2. | Suitable drawbar eyes — Class C50 drawbar couplings shall be compatible with all Class D50 drawbar eyes and couplings with the specified characteristics. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

Suitable drawbar eyes — Class C50 drawbar couplings shall be compatible with all Class D50 drawbar eyes and couplings with the specified characteristics.

| 3.3. | Jaw
  Class C50 drawbar couplings shall have a jaw which is designed such that the appropriate drawbar eye is guided into the coupling.
  If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the vertical axis, it shall establish itself automatically in the normal position and with the coupling pin open, be effectively restrained in this position to give satisfactory guidance for the drawbar eye during the coupling procedure.
  If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the horizontal transverse axis, the joint providing the rotation capability shall be restrained in its normal position by a locking torque. The torque shall be sufficient to prevent a force of 200 N acting vertically upwards on the top of the jaw producing any deflection of the joint from its normal position. The locking torque shall be greater than that created by operation of the hand lever described in paragraph 3.6 of this annex. It shall be possible to bring the jaw to its normal position manually. A jaw that pivots about the horizontal transverse axis is only approved for bearing mass, S, of up to 50 kg and a V-value of up to 5 kN.
  If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, is pivoted about the longitudinal axis, the rotation shall be restrained by a locking torque of at least 100 Nm.
  The minimum required size of the jaw depends on the D value of the coupling:






  D value ≤ 18 kN | — width 150 mm, height 100 mm |
| --- | --- | --- |
| D value > 18 kN ≤ 25 kN | — width 280 mm, height 170 mm |
| D value > 25 kN | — width 360 mm, height 200 mm |

3.3.

Jaw

Class C50 drawbar couplings shall have a jaw which is designed such that the appropriate drawbar eye is guided into the coupling.

If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the vertical axis, it shall establish itself automatically in the normal position and with the coupling pin open, be effectively restrained in this position to give satisfactory guidance for the drawbar eye during the coupling procedure.

If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the horizontal transverse axis, the joint providing the rotation capability shall be restrained in its normal position by a locking torque. The torque shall be sufficient to prevent a force of 200 N acting vertically upwards on the top of the jaw producing any deflection of the joint from its normal position. The locking torque shall be greater than that created by operation of the hand lever described in paragraph 3.6 of this annex. It shall be possible to bring the jaw to its normal position manually. A jaw that pivots about the horizontal transverse axis is only approved for bearing mass, S, of up to 50 kg and a V-value of up to 5 kN.

If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, is pivoted about the longitudinal axis, the rotation shall be restrained by a locking torque of at least 100 Nm.

The minimum required size of the jaw depends on the D value of the coupling:

D value ≤ 18 kN

— width 150 mm, height 100 mm

D value > 18 kN ≤ 25 kN

— width 280 mm, height 170 mm

D value > 25 kN

— width 360 mm, height 200 mm

The external corners of the jaw may be radiused.

Smaller jaws are permitted for Class C50-X drawbar couplings if their use is restricted to centre axle trailers up to 3,5 tonnes maximum permissible mass or if the use of a jaw from the above table is impossible due to technical reasons and if, furthermore, there are special circumstances such as visual aids for ensuring safe execution of the automatic coupling procedure and if the field of application is restricted in the approval according to information given by the coupling manufacturer in the communication form shown in annex 1.

| 3.4. | Minimum articulation of the coupled drawbar eye
  The drawbar eye, when coupled to a drawbar coupling but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the degrees of articulation given below. If part of the articulation is provided by a special joint (Class C50-X drawbar couplings only), the field of application, given in the communication form shown in annex 1, shall be restricted to the cases stated in annex 7, paragraph 1.3.8. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

Minimum articulation of the coupled drawbar eye

The drawbar eye, when coupled to a drawbar coupling but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the degrees of articulation given below. If part of the articulation is provided by a special joint (Class C50-X drawbar couplings only), the field of application, given in the communication form shown in annex 1, shall be restricted to the cases stated in annex 7, paragraph 1.3.8.

| 3.4.1. | ±90o horizontally about the vertical axis from the longitudinal axis of the vehicle — see Figure 5. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1.

±90o horizontally about the vertical axis from the longitudinal axis of the vehicle — see Figure 5.

Figure 5

Horizontal rotation of the coupled drawbar eye

Image

| 3.4.2. | ±20o vertically about the transverse axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 6. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.2.

±20o vertically about the transverse axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 6.

Figure 6

Vertical rotation of the coupled drawbar eye

Image

| 3.4.3. | ±25o axial rotation about the longitudinal axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 7. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.3.

±25o axial rotation about the longitudinal axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 7.

Figure 7

Axial rotation of the coupled drawbar eye

Image

| 3.5. | Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:
  In the closed position the coupling pin shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.
  The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.
  The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).
  However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.

Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:

In the closed position the coupling pin shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.

The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.

The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).

However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design.

| 3.6. | Hand levers
  Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.

Hand levers

Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation.

| 3.7. | Special requirements for standard drawbar couplings of Class C50-1 to C50-6: |
| --- | --- |

3.7.

Special requirements for standard drawbar couplings of Class C50-1 to C50-6:

| 3.7.1. | The swivel motion of the drawbar eye about the transverse axis must be achieved through the spherical shape of the coupling pin (and not by means of a joint); |
| --- | --- |

3.7.1.

The swivel motion of the drawbar eye about the transverse axis must be achieved through the spherical shape of the coupling pin (and not by means of a joint);

| 3.7.2. | Tensile and compressive shock loads along the longitudinal axis due to the clearance between the coupling pin and the drawbar eye shall be attenuated by spring and/or damping devices (except C50-1). |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.

Tensile and compressive shock loads along the longitudinal axis due to the clearance between the coupling pin and the drawbar eye shall be attenuated by spring and/or damping devices (except C50-1).

| 3.7.3. | The dimensions shall be as given in Figure 8 and Table 4. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.

The dimensions shall be as given in Figure 8 and Table 4.

| 3.7.4. | The couplings shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 5. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.4.

The couplings shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 5.

| 3.7.5. | The coupling shall be opened by means of a hand lever at the coupling (no remote control). |
| --- | --- |

3.7.5.

The coupling shall be opened by means of a hand lever at the coupling (no remote control).

Figure 8

Dimensions of standard drawbar couplings (mm),

(see Table 4)

Image

Table 4

Dimensions of standard drawbar couplings (mm), see Figure 8

| Class | C50-1 | C50-2 | C50-3 | C50-4 | C50-5 | C50-6, C50-7 | Remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | 83 | 83 | 120 | 140 | 160 | 160 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | 56 | 56 | 55 | 80 | 100 | 100 | ±0,5 |
| d1 | | 54 | 74 | 84 | 94 | 94 | max. |
| d2 | 10,5 | 10,5 | 15 | 17 | 21 | 21 | H13 |
| f | 110 | 110 | 155 | 180 | 140 | 140 | ±3,0 |
| g | 85 | 85 | 90 | 120 | 140 | 140 | ±3,0 |
| a | 100 | 170 | 200 | 200 | 200 | 200 | ±20,0 - 0 |
| b | 150 | 280 | 360 | 360 | 360 | 360 | ±20,0 - 0 |
| c | 20 | 20 | 24 | 30 | 30 | 30 | max. |
| h | 150 | 190 | 265 | 265 | 265 | 265 | max. |
| l1 | | 150 | 250 | 300 | 300 | 300 | max. |
| l2 | 150 | 300 | 330 | 330 | 330 | 330 | max. |
| l3 | 100 | 160 | 180 | 180 | 180 | 180 | ±20,0 |
| T | | 15 | 20 | 35 | 35 | 35 | max. |

Class

C50-1

C50-2

C50-3

C50-4

C50-5

C50-6, C50-7

Remarks

e1

83

83

120

140

160

160

±0,5

e2

56

56

55

80

100

100

±0,5

d1

54

74

84

94

94

max.

d2

10,5

10,5

15

17

21

21

H13

f

110

110

155

180

140

140

±3,0

g

85

85

90

120

140

140

±3,0

a

100

170

200

200

200

200

±20,0 - 0

b

150

280

360

360

360

360

±20,0 - 0

c

20

20

24

30

30

30

max.

h

150

190

265

265

265

265

max.

l1

150

250

300

300

300

max.

l2

150

300

330

330

330

330

max.

l3

100

160

180

180

180

180

±20,0

T

15

20

35

35

35

max.

Table 5

Characteristic values for standard drawbar couplings

| Class | C50-1 | C50-2 | C50-3 | C50-4 | C50-5 | C50-6 | C50-7 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D | 18 | 25 | 70 | 100 | 130 | 190 | 190 |
| Dc | 18 | 25 | 50 | 70 | 90 | 120 | 130 |
| S | 200 | 250 | 650 | 900 | 1000 | 1000 | 1000 |
| V | 12 | 10 | 18 | 25 | 35 | 50 | 75 |

Class

C50-1

C50-2

C50-3

C50-4

C50-5

C50-6

C50-7

D

18

25

70

100

130

190

190

Dc

18

25

50

70

90

120

130

S

200

250

650

900

1000

1000

1000

V

12

10

18

25

35

50

75

| D | = | maximum D value (kN) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Dc | = | maximum D value (kN) for centre axle trailer applications |
| S | = | maximum static vertical load on coupling (kg) |
| V | = | maximum V value (kN) |

D

=

maximum D value (kN)

Dc

=

maximum D value (kN) for centre axle trailer applications

S

=

maximum static vertical load on coupling (kg)

V

=

maximum V value (kN)

4.   DRAWBAR EYES

| 4.1. | General requirements for drawbar eyes of Class D50:
  All drawbar eyes of Class D50 shall be able to satisfy the test stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.4.
  Class D50 drawbar eyes are intended for use with C50 drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes shall not be able to rotate axially (because the respective couplings can rotate).
  If Class D50 drawbar eyes are fitted with sleeves, they shall comply with the dimensions shown in Figure 9 (not permitted for Class D50-C) or Figure 10.
  The sleeves must not be welded into the drawbar eyes.
  Class D50 drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in paragraph 4.2. The form of shank for drawbar eyes of Class D50-X is not specified but for a distance of 210 mm from the centre of the eye the height “h” and the width “b” shall be within the limits given in Table 6. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

General requirements for drawbar eyes of Class D50:

All drawbar eyes of Class D50 shall be able to satisfy the test stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.4.

Class D50 drawbar eyes are intended for use with C50 drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes shall not be able to rotate axially (because the respective couplings can rotate).

If Class D50 drawbar eyes are fitted with sleeves, they shall comply with the dimensions shown in Figure 9 (not permitted for Class D50-C) or Figure 10.

The sleeves must not be welded into the drawbar eyes.

Class D50 drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in paragraph 4.2. The form of shank for drawbar eyes of Class D50-X is not specified but for a distance of 210 mm from the centre of the eye the height “h” and the width “b” shall be within the limits given in Table 6.

Figure 9

Slotted sleeve for Class D50 drawbar eyes

Image

Figure 10

Non-slotted sleeve for Class D50-C drawbar eyes

Image

Table 6

Dimensions for drawbar eyes D50-A and D50-X, see Figure 11

| Class | h (mm) | b (mm) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| D50-A | 65 +2/-1 | 60 +2/-1 |
| D50-X | 80 max. | 62 max. |

Class

h (mm)

b (mm)

D50-A

65 +2/-1

60 +2/-1

D50-X

80 max.

62 max.

Table 7

Characteristic values for standard drawbar eyes

| Class | D | Dc | S | V |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D50-A | 130 | 90 | 1 000 | 30 |
| D50-B | 130 | 90 | 1 000 | 25 |
| D50-C | 190 | 120 | 1 000 | 50 |
| D50-D | 190 | 130 | 1 000 | 75 |

Class

D

Dc

S

V

D50-A

130

90

1 000

30

D50-B

130

90

1 000

25

D50-C

190

120

1 000

50

D50-D

190

130

1 000

75

| 4.2. | Special requirements for Class D50 drawbar eyes: |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

Special requirements for Class D50 drawbar eyes:

| 4.2.1. | Class D50-A and D50-X drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 11. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.1.

Class D50-A and D50-X drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 11.

Figure 11

Dimensions of Classes D50-A and D50-X drawbar eyes,

(see Table 6)

Image

| 4.2.2. | Class D50-B drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 12. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.2.

Class D50-B drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 12.

Figure 12

Dimensions of Class D50-B drawbar eyes,

(see other dimensions in Figure 11)

Image

| 4.2.3. | Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 13. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.3.

Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 13.

Figure 13

Dimensions of Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes,

(see other dimensions in Figure 11)

Image

| 4.2.4. | Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall be fitted with non slotted sleeves shown in Figure 10. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.4.

Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall be fitted with non slotted sleeves shown in Figure 10.

| 4.3. | Load values for standard drawbar eyes.
  Standard drawbar eyes and the means of attachment shall be suitable for, and tested for, the load values stated in Table 7. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

Load values for standard drawbar eyes.

Standard drawbar eyes and the means of attachment shall be suitable for, and tested for, the load values stated in Table 7.

| 4.4. | General requirements for Class L toroidal drawbar eyes: |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

General requirements for Class L toroidal drawbar eyes:

| 4.4.1. | Class L toroidal drawbar eyes are intended for use with Class K hook type couplings |
| --- | --- |

4.4.1.

Class L toroidal drawbar eyes are intended for use with Class K hook type couplings

| 4.4.2. | When used with a Class K hook type coupling they shall meet the requirements for articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.2.

When used with a Class K hook type coupling they shall meet the requirements for articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex.

| 4.4.3. | Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in Figure 14 and Table 8 |
| --- | --- |

4.4.3.

Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in Figure 14 and Table 8

Figure 14

Dimensions of Class L toroidal drawbar eyes

(see Table 8)

Image

| 4.4.4. | Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.4 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 9.
  Table 8
  Dimensions of Class L toroidal drawbar eyes — see Figure 14 (Dimensions in mm)











  Class | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| a | 68
  +1,6/-0,0 | 76,2
  ±0,8 | 76,2
  ±0,8 | 76,2
  ±0,8 | 1 000 | |
| b | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | |
| c | 70 | 65 | 65 | 65 | 70 | min. |

4.4.4.

Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.4 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 9.

Table 8

Dimensions of Class L toroidal drawbar eyes — see Figure 14 (Dimensions in mm)

Class

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

remarks

a

68

+1,6/-0,0

76,2

±0,8

76,2

±0,8

76,2

±0,8

1 000

b

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

c

70

65

65

65

70

min.

Table 9

Characteristic values for Class L toroidal drawbar eyes

| Class | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D kN | 30 | 70 | 100 | 130 | 180 |
| Dc kN | 27 | 54 | 70 | 90 | 120 |
| S kg | 200 | 700 | 950 | 1 000 | 1 000 |
| V kN | 12 | 18 | 25 | 35 | 50 |

Class

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

D kN

30

70

100

130

180

Dc kN

27

54

70

90

120

S kg

200

700

950

1 000

1 000

V kN

12

18

25

35

50

5.   DRAWBARS

| 5.1. | Drawbars of class E shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

Drawbars of class E shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3.

| 5.2. | In order to provide a connection to the towing vehicle, the drawbars can be fitted either with coupling heads as in paragraph 2 or drawbar eyes as in paragraph 4 of this annex. The coupling heads and drawbar eyes can be attached by screwing, bolting or welding. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

In order to provide a connection to the towing vehicle, the drawbars can be fitted either with coupling heads as in paragraph 2 or drawbar eyes as in paragraph 4 of this annex. The coupling heads and drawbar eyes can be attached by screwing, bolting or welding.

| 5.3. | Height adjusting devices for hinged drawbars. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

Height adjusting devices for hinged drawbars.

| 5.3.1. | Hinged drawbars shall be fitted with devices for adjusting the drawbar to the height of the coupling device or jaw. These devices shall be designed so that the drawbar can be adjusted by one person without tools or any other aids. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.1.

Hinged drawbars shall be fitted with devices for adjusting the drawbar to the height of the coupling device or jaw. These devices shall be designed so that the drawbar can be adjusted by one person without tools or any other aids.

| 5.3.2. | Height adjusting devices shall be able to adjust the drawbar eyes or ball couplings from the horizontal above the ground at least 300 mm upwards and downwards. Within this range the drawbar shall be adjustable steplessly, or in maximum steps of 50 mm measured at the drawbar eye or ball coupling. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.

Height adjusting devices shall be able to adjust the drawbar eyes or ball couplings from the horizontal above the ground at least 300 mm upwards and downwards. Within this range the drawbar shall be adjustable steplessly, or in maximum steps of 50 mm measured at the drawbar eye or ball coupling.

| 5.3.3. | Height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the easy movement of the drawbar after coupling. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.3.

Height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the easy movement of the drawbar after coupling.

| 5.3.4. | The height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the action of any inertia, overrun type, brake. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.

The height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the action of any inertia, overrun type, brake.

| 5.4. | In the case of drawbars combined with inertia, overrun, brakes, the distance between the centre of the drawbar eye and the end of the free shank of the drawbar eye shall not be less than 200 mm in the brake application position. With the shank of the drawbar eye fully inserted the distance shall not be less than 150 mm. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.

In the case of drawbars combined with inertia, overrun, brakes, the distance between the centre of the drawbar eye and the end of the free shank of the drawbar eye shall not be less than 200 mm in the brake application position. With the shank of the drawbar eye fully inserted the distance shall not be less than 150 mm.

| 5.5. | Drawbars for use on centre axle trailers shall possess at least half the moment of resistance against lateral forces as against vertical forces. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.

Drawbars for use on centre axle trailers shall possess at least half the moment of resistance against lateral forces as against vertical forces.

6.   DRAWBEAMS

| 6.1. | Drawbeams of Class F shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

Drawbeams of Class F shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3.

| 6.2. | The drilling pattern for mounting of Class C standard drawbar couplings shall be in accordance with Figure 15 and Table 10 below. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

The drilling pattern for mounting of Class C standard drawbar couplings shall be in accordance with Figure 15 and Table 10 below.

| 6.3. | Drawbeams shall not be welded to the chassis, bodywork or other part of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

Drawbeams shall not be welded to the chassis, bodywork or other part of the vehicle.

Figure 15

Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings

(see Table 10)

Image

Table 10

Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings (mm) — see Figure 15

| Class | C50-1 | C50-2 | C50-3 | C50-4 | C50-5 | C50-6, C50-7 | Remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | 83 | 83 | 120 | 140 | 160 | 160 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | 56 | 56 | 55 | 80 | 100 | 100 | ±0,5 |
| d1 | | 55 | 75 | 85 | 95 | 95 | +1,0/-0,5 |
| d2 | 10,5 | 10,5 | 15 | 17 | 21 | 21 | H13 |
| T | | 15 | 20 | 35 | 35 | 35 | max. |
| F | 120 | 120 | 165 | 190 | 210 | 210 | min. |
| G | 195 | 95 | 100 | 130 | 150 | 150 | min. |
| L1 | | 200 | 300 | 400 | 400 | 400 | min. |

Class

C50-1

C50-2

C50-3

C50-4

C50-5

C50-6, C50-7

Remarks

e1

83

83

120

140

160

160

±0,5

e2

56

56

55

80

100

100

±0,5

d1

55

75

85

95

95

+1,0/-0,5

d2

10,5

10,5

15

17

21

21

H13

T

15

20

35

35

35

max.

F

120

120

165

190

210

210

min.

G

195

95

100

130

150

150

min.

L1

200

300

400

400

400

min.

7.   FIFTH WHEEL COUPLINGS AND STEERING WEDGES

The requirements of paragraphs 7.1 to 7.7 are applicable to all fifth wheel couplings of Class G50.

Additional requirements which shall be fulfilled by standard coupling devices are given in paragraph 7.9.

Steering wedges shall satisfy the requirements listed in paragraph 7.8.

| 7.1. | Suitable fifth wheel coupling pins
  Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall be designed so that they can be used with Class H50 coupling pins and, together, provide the specified characteristics. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Suitable fifth wheel coupling pins

Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall be designed so that they can be used with Class H50 coupling pins and, together, provide the specified characteristics.

| 7.2. | Guides
  Fifth wheel couplings shall be equipped with a guide which ensures safe and correct engagement of the coupling pin. The entry width of the guide for standard 50 mm diameter fifth wheel couplings shall be at least 350 mm (see Figure 16).
  For small, non-standard, fifth wheel couplings of Class G50-X and having a maximum “D” value of 25 kN, the entry width shall be at least 250 mm. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.

Guides

Fifth wheel couplings shall be equipped with a guide which ensures safe and correct engagement of the coupling pin. The entry width of the guide for standard 50 mm diameter fifth wheel couplings shall be at least 350 mm (see Figure 16).

For small, non-standard, fifth wheel couplings of Class G50-X and having a maximum “D” value of 25 kN, the entry width shall be at least 250 mm.

Figure 16

Dimensions of standard fifth wheel couplings

(see Table 11)

Image

Figure 16a

Mounting holes tolerances for class J mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings

(see para. 9.1. of this annex)

Image

Table 11

Dimensions of standard fifth wheel couplings (mm)

(see Figure 16)

| Class | G50-1 | G50-2 | G50-3 | G50-4 | G50-5 | G50-6 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| H | 140-159 | 160-179 | 180199 | 200-219 | 220-239 | 240-260 |

Class

G50-1

G50-2

G50-3

G50-4

G50-5

G50-6

H

140-159

160-179

180199

200-219

220-239

240-260

| 7.3. | Minimum articulation of the fifth wheel coupling
  With the coupling pin engaged, without the fifth wheel coupling being attached to a vehicle or mounting plate, but taking into account the effect of the mounting bolts, the coupling shall permit, simultaneously, the following minimum values of articulation of the coupling pin: |
| --- | --- |

7.3.

Minimum articulation of the fifth wheel coupling

With the coupling pin engaged, without the fifth wheel coupling being attached to a vehicle or mounting plate, but taking into account the effect of the mounting bolts, the coupling shall permit, simultaneously, the following minimum values of articulation of the coupling pin:

| 7.3.1. | ±90o about the vertical axis (not applicable to fifth wheel couplings with positive steering); |
| --- | --- |

7.3.1.

±90o about the vertical axis (not applicable to fifth wheel couplings with positive steering);

| 7.3.2. | ±12o about the horizontal axis transverse to the direction of travel. This angle does not necessarily cover off-road use. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.2.

±12o about the horizontal axis transverse to the direction of travel. This angle does not necessarily cover off-road use.

| 7.3.3. | Axial rotation about the longitudinal axis of up to ±3o is permitted. However, on a fully oscillating fifth wheel coupling, this angle may be exceeded, providing that the locking mechanism enables the restriction of the rotation to ±3o maximum. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.3.

Axial rotation about the longitudinal axis of up to ±3o is permitted. However, on a fully oscillating fifth wheel coupling, this angle may be exceeded, providing that the locking mechanism enables the restriction of the rotation to ±3o maximum.

| 7.4. | Locking devices to prevent uncoupling of fifth wheel couplings
  The fifth wheel coupling shall be locked in the coupled position by two positive mechanical locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.
  The primary locking device shall operate automatically but the secondary locking device may either be automatic or be engaged manually. The secondary locking device may be designed to work in conjunction with the primary device and provide an additional positive mechanical lock for the primary device. It shall only be possible to engage the secondary locking device if the primary device is properly engaged.
  It shall not be possible for the locking devices to be released inadvertently. Release shall require intentional action by the driver or operator of the vehicle.
  The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be indicated visually by a mechanical device and it shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, to allow the position to be checked during darkness. The indication device shall indicate the engagement of both primary and secondary locking devices, however, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one device to be indicated if, in this case, the engagement of the other device is a simultaneous and inherent feature of the design. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.

Locking devices to prevent uncoupling of fifth wheel couplings

The fifth wheel coupling shall be locked in the coupled position by two positive mechanical locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.

The primary locking device shall operate automatically but the secondary locking device may either be automatic or be engaged manually. The secondary locking device may be designed to work in conjunction with the primary device and provide an additional positive mechanical lock for the primary device. It shall only be possible to engage the secondary locking device if the primary device is properly engaged.

It shall not be possible for the locking devices to be released inadvertently. Release shall require intentional action by the driver or operator of the vehicle.

The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be indicated visually by a mechanical device and it shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, to allow the position to be checked during darkness. The indication device shall indicate the engagement of both primary and secondary locking devices, however, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one device to be indicated if, in this case, the engagement of the other device is a simultaneous and inherent feature of the design.

| 7.5. | Operating devices or release mechanisms
  In the closed position the operating devices or release mechanisms shall be prevented from being operated inadvertently or accidentally. The locking system shall be such as to require positive, conscious action to release the locking device in order to operate coupling release mechanism. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.

Operating devices or release mechanisms

In the closed position the operating devices or release mechanisms shall be prevented from being operated inadvertently or accidentally. The locking system shall be such as to require positive, conscious action to release the locking device in order to operate coupling release mechanism.

| 7.6. | Surface finish
  The surfaces of the coupling plate and coupling lock shall be functionally satisfactory and be carefully machined, forged, cast or pressed. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.

Surface finish

The surfaces of the coupling plate and coupling lock shall be functionally satisfactory and be carefully machined, forged, cast or pressed.

| 7.7. | Load requirements
  All fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 4.7. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.

Load requirements

All fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 4.7.

| 7.8. | Steering wedges |
| --- | --- |

7.8.

Steering wedges

| 7.8.1. | The dimensions of steering wedges for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be as in Figure 17. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.1.

The dimensions of steering wedges for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be as in Figure 17.

Figure 17

Dimensions of spring-mounted steering wedges

Image

| 7.8.2. | The steering wedge shall allow safe and correct coupling and shall be spring-mounted. The strength of the spring shall be selected so that it is possible to couple an unloaded semitrailer and so that, with the semitrailer fully loaded the steering wedge is firmly in contact with the flanks of the coupling during use. Uncoupling of the fifth wheel shall be possible with the semitrailer both loaded and unloaded. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.2.

The steering wedge shall allow safe and correct coupling and shall be spring-mounted. The strength of the spring shall be selected so that it is possible to couple an unloaded semitrailer and so that, with the semitrailer fully loaded the steering wedge is firmly in contact with the flanks of the coupling during use. Uncoupling of the fifth wheel shall be possible with the semitrailer both loaded and unloaded.

| 7.9. | Special requirements for standard fifth wheel couplings: |
| --- | --- |

7.9.

Special requirements for standard fifth wheel couplings:

| 7.9.1. | the dimensions shall be as shown in Figure 16 and Table 11. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.1.

the dimensions shall be as shown in Figure 16 and Table 11.

| 7.9.2. | they shall be suitable for, and tested for, a D value of 150 kN and a U value of 20 tonnes. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.2.

they shall be suitable for, and tested for, a D value of 150 kN and a U value of 20 tonnes.

| 7.9.3. | release shall be possible by a hand lever mounted directly on the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.3.

release shall be possible by a hand lever mounted directly on the coupling.

| 7.9.4. | they shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers by means of steering wedges — see paragraph 7.8. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.4.

they shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers by means of steering wedges — see paragraph 7.8.

8.   FIFTH WHEEL COUPLING PINS

| 8.1. | Fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H50 (ISO 337) shall have the dimensions shown in Figure 18 |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

Fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H50 (ISO 337) shall have the dimensions shown in Figure 18

Figure 18

Dimensions of Class H50 fifth wheel coupling pins

Image

| 8.2. | The coupling pins shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.9. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

The coupling pins shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.9.

9.   MOUNTING PLATES

| 9.1. | Class J mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall have circular mounting holes positioned as shown in Figure 16a if they are intended for standard fifth wheel couplings. However, the mounting holes shall be 17 mm + 2,0 mm/-0,0 mm diameter. The holes shall be circular, NOT slotted (see Figure 16a). |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

Class J mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall have circular mounting holes positioned as shown in Figure 16a if they are intended for standard fifth wheel couplings. However, the mounting holes shall be 17 mm + 2,0 mm/-0,0 mm diameter. The holes shall be circular, NOT slotted (see Figure 16a).

| 9.2. | Mounting plates for standard fifth wheel couplings shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers (with steering wedges). Mounting plates for non-standard fifth wheel couplings which are unsuitable for positive steering shall be marked appropriately. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

Mounting plates for standard fifth wheel couplings shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers (with steering wedges). Mounting plates for non-standard fifth wheel couplings which are unsuitable for positive steering shall be marked appropriately.

| 9.3. | Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.8. |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.8.

10.   HOOK TYPE COUPLINGS

| 10.1. | General requirements for Class K hook type couplings: |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

General requirements for Class K hook type couplings:

| 10.1.1. | All Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.5 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 13 |
| --- | --- |

10.1.1.

All Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.5 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 13

| 10.1.2. | Class K hook type couplings shall have the dimensions given in Figure 19 and Table 12. Class K1 to K4 are non-automatic couplings for use only on trailers not exceeding 3,5 tonnes maximum permissible mass and Class KA1 to KA3 are automatic couplings. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.2.

Class K hook type couplings shall have the dimensions given in Figure 19 and Table 12. Class K1 to K4 are non-automatic couplings for use only on trailers not exceeding 3,5 tonnes maximum permissible mass and Class KA1 to KA3 are automatic couplings.

Figure 19

Dimensions and articulation of Class K hook type couplings

Image

| 10.1.3. | A hook type coupling shall only be used with a toroidal drawbar eye and when used with a Class L toroidal drawbar eye the Class K coupling shall have the degrees of articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.3.

A hook type coupling shall only be used with a toroidal drawbar eye and when used with a Class L toroidal drawbar eye the Class K coupling shall have the degrees of articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex.

| 10.1.4. | A Class K hook type coupling shall be used with a toroidal eye giving a minimum clearance, or free movement, of 3 mm and a maximum clearance of 5 mm when new. Suitable drawbar eyes shall be declared by the coupling manufacturer on the Communication form shown in annex 1. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.4.

A Class K hook type coupling shall be used with a toroidal eye giving a minimum clearance, or free movement, of 3 mm and a maximum clearance of 5 mm when new. Suitable drawbar eyes shall be declared by the coupling manufacturer on the Communication form shown in annex 1.

| 10.2. | A Class K coupling when used with a Class L toroidal eye, but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the following non-simultaneous angles of articulation — see also Figure 19: |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

A Class K coupling when used with a Class L toroidal eye, but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the following non-simultaneous angles of articulation — see also Figure 19:

| 10.2.1. | ±90o horizontally about the vertical axis of the coupling; |
| --- | --- |

10.2.1.

±90o horizontally about the vertical axis of the coupling;

| 10.2.2. | ±40o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis of the coupling; |
| --- | --- |

10.2.2.

±40o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis of the coupling;

| 10.2.3. | ±20o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal centre line of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.3.

±20o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal centre line of the coupling.

| 10.3. | Automatic Class K hook type couplings shall have a jaw designed such that the drawbar eye is guided into the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

10.3.

Automatic Class K hook type couplings shall have a jaw designed such that the drawbar eye is guided into the coupling.

| 10.4. | Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:
  In the closed position the coupling shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.
  The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.
  The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).
  However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design. |
| --- | --- |

10.4.

Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:

In the closed position the coupling shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.

The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.

The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).

However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design.

| 10.5. | Hand levers
  Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation.
  Table 12
  Dimensions for Class K hook type couplings — see Figure 19













  Class | K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | KA1 | KA2 | KA3 | Remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | | 83 | 83 | 120 | 120 | 140 | 160 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | | 56 | 56 | 55 | 55 | 80 | 100 | ±0,5 |
| e3 | 90 | | | | | | | ±0,5 |
| d2 | 17 | 10,5 | 10,5 | 15 | 15 | 17 | 21 | H13 |
| c | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | min. |
| f | 130 | 175 | 175 | 180 | 180 | 200 | 200 | max. |
| g | 100 | 100 | 100 | 120 | 120 | 140 | 200 | max. |
| a | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | ±1,6 - 0 |
| L1 | 120 | 120 | 120 | 120 | 250 | 300 | 300 | max. |
| L2 | 74 | 74 | 63 | 74 | 90 | 90 | 90 | max. |
| L3 | 110 | 130 | 130 | 150 | 150 | 200 | 200 | max. |

10.5.

Hand levers

Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation.

Table 12

Dimensions for Class K hook type couplings — see Figure 19

Class

K1

K2

K3

K4

KA1

KA2

KA3

Remarks

e1

83

83

120

120

140

160

±0,5

e2

56

56

55

55

80

100

±0,5

e3

90

±0,5

d2

17

10,5

10,5

15

15

17

21

H13

c

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

min.

f

130

175

175

180

180

200

200

max.

g

100

100

100

120

120

140

200

max.

a

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

±1,6 - 0

L1

120

120

120

120

250

300

300

max.

L2

74

74

63

74

90

90

90

max.

L3

110

130

130

150

150

200

200

max.

Table 13

Characteristic values for Class K hook type couplings

| Class | K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | KA1 | KA2 | KA3 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D kN | 17 | 20 | 20 | 25 | 70 | 100 | 130 |
| Dc kN | | | 17 | 20 | 54 | 70 | 90 |
| S kg | 120 | 120 | 200 | 250 | 700 | 900 | 1000 |
| V kN | | | 10 | 10 | 18 | 25 | 35 |

Class

K1

K2

K3

K4

KA1

KA2

KA3

D kN

17

20

20

25

70

100

130

Dc kN

17

20

54

70

90

S kg

120

120

200

250

700

900

1000

V kN

10

10

18

25

35

11.   DEDICATED DRAWBAR TYPE COUPLINGS — CLASS T

| 11.1. | Class T dedicated drawbar type couplings are intended for use on specific vehicle combinations, for example, car transporters. These vehicles have special structures and may need particular and unusual location of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

11.1.

Class T dedicated drawbar type couplings are intended for use on specific vehicle combinations, for example, car transporters. These vehicles have special structures and may need particular and unusual location of the coupling.

| 11.2. | Class T couplings shall be restricted to use with centre axle trailers and this restriction shall be notified on the Communication form shown in annex 1. |
| --- | --- |

11.2.

Class T couplings shall be restricted to use with centre axle trailers and this restriction shall be notified on the Communication form shown in annex 1.

| 11.3. | Class T couplings shall be approved as a matched pair and it shall not be possible to separate the coupling other than in a workshop using tools which are not normally carried on the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

11.3.

Class T couplings shall be approved as a matched pair and it shall not be possible to separate the coupling other than in a workshop using tools which are not normally carried on the vehicle.

| 11.4. | Class T couplings shall not be automatic in operation. |
| --- | --- |

11.4.

Class T couplings shall not be automatic in operation.

| 11.5. | Class T couplings shall satisfy the relevant test requirements given in annex 6, paragraph 3.3., except paragraph 3.3.4. |
| --- | --- |

11.5.

Class T couplings shall satisfy the relevant test requirements given in annex 6, paragraph 3.3., except paragraph 3.3.4.

| 11.6. | The following minimum and simultaneous angles of articulation shall be possible with the coupling not fitted to a vehicle but assembled, and in the same normal position as when fitted to a vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

11.6.

The following minimum and simultaneous angles of articulation shall be possible with the coupling not fitted to a vehicle but assembled, and in the same normal position as when fitted to a vehicle;

| 11.6.1. | ±90o horizontally about the vertical axis; |
| --- | --- |

11.6.1.

±90o horizontally about the vertical axis;

| 11.6.2. | ±8o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis; |
| --- | --- |

11.6.2.

±8o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis;

| 11.6.3. | ±3o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal axis. |
| --- | --- |

11.6.3.

±3o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal axis.

12.   DEVICES FOR REMOTE INDICATION AND REMOTE CONTROL

| 12.1. | General requirements
  Devices for remote indication and remote control are permitted only on automatic coupling devices of Classes C50-X and G50-X.
  Devices for remote indication and remote control shall not interfere with the minimum free movement of the coupled drawbar eye or coupled semitrailer. They shall be permanently fitted to the vehicle.
  All the devices for remote indication or remote control fall within the scope of testing and approval of the coupling device together with all parts of the operating devices and transmission devices. |
| --- | --- |

12.1.

General requirements

Devices for remote indication and remote control are permitted only on automatic coupling devices of Classes C50-X and G50-X.

Devices for remote indication and remote control shall not interfere with the minimum free movement of the coupled drawbar eye or coupled semitrailer. They shall be permanently fitted to the vehicle.

All the devices for remote indication or remote control fall within the scope of testing and approval of the coupling device together with all parts of the operating devices and transmission devices.

| 12.2. | Remote indication |
| --- | --- |

12.2.

Remote indication

| 12.2.1. | For an automatic coupling procedure, remote indication devices shall indicate the closed and doubly locked position of the coupling in an optical manner according to paragraph 12.2.2. Additionally the open position may be indicated as in paragraph 12.2.3.
  The remote indication device shall be automatically activated and reset during every opening and closing of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.1.

For an automatic coupling procedure, remote indication devices shall indicate the closed and doubly locked position of the coupling in an optical manner according to paragraph 12.2.2. Additionally the open position may be indicated as in paragraph 12.2.3.

The remote indication device shall be automatically activated and reset during every opening and closing of the coupling.

| 12.2.2. | The change from the open to the closed and doubly locked position shall be indicated by a green optical signal. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.2.

The change from the open to the closed and doubly locked position shall be indicated by a green optical signal.

| 12.2.3. | If the open and/or unlocked position is indicated, a red optical signal shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.3.

If the open and/or unlocked position is indicated, a red optical signal shall be used.

| 12.2.4. | In the case of indicating the completion of the automatic coupling procedure, the remote indicator shall ensure that the coupling pin has reached the doubly locked end position. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.4.

In the case of indicating the completion of the automatic coupling procedure, the remote indicator shall ensure that the coupling pin has reached the doubly locked end position.

| 12.2.5. | The appearance of any fault in the remote indication system shall not indicate a closed and locked position during the coupling procedure if the end position has not been reached. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.5.

The appearance of any fault in the remote indication system shall not indicate a closed and locked position during the coupling procedure if the end position has not been reached.

| 12.2.6. | The disengagement of one of the two locking devices shall cause the green optical signal to extinguish and the red optical signal (if fitted) to show. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.6.

The disengagement of one of the two locking devices shall cause the green optical signal to extinguish and the red optical signal (if fitted) to show.

| 12.2.7. | The mechanical indicators fitted directly to the coupling device shall be retained. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.7.

The mechanical indicators fitted directly to the coupling device shall be retained.

| 12.2.8. | In order to avoid distracting the driver during normal driving, there shall be a provision for switching off the remote indication device but this shall be automatically reactivated when the coupling is next opened and closed — see paragraph 12.2.1. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.8.

In order to avoid distracting the driver during normal driving, there shall be a provision for switching off the remote indication device but this shall be automatically reactivated when the coupling is next opened and closed — see paragraph 12.2.1.

| 12.2.9. | The operating controls and indicators of the remote indication devices shall be mounted within the driver's field of vision and be permanently and clearly identified. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.9.

The operating controls and indicators of the remote indication devices shall be mounted within the driver's field of vision and be permanently and clearly identified.

| 12.3. | Remote control |
| --- | --- |

12.3.

Remote control

| 12.3.1. | If a remote control device, as defined in paragraph 2.8 of this Regulation, is employed, there shall also be a remote indication device as described in paragraph 12.2 which shall at least indicate the open condition of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.1.

If a remote control device, as defined in paragraph 2.8 of this Regulation, is employed, there shall also be a remote indication device as described in paragraph 12.2 which shall at least indicate the open condition of the coupling.

| 12.3.2. | There shall be a dedicated switch (i.e. master switch, lever or valve) to enable the coupling to be opened or closed by means of the remote control device. If this master switch is not located in the driving cab it shall not be in a position where it is freely accessible to unauthorised persons or it shall be lockable. The actual operation of the coupling from the driving cab may only be possible when inadvertent operation has been precluded, for example by an operation requiring the use of two hands.
  It shall be possible to ascertain whether opening of the coupling under remote control has been completed or not. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.2.

There shall be a dedicated switch (i.e. master switch, lever or valve) to enable the coupling to be opened or closed by means of the remote control device. If this master switch is not located in the driving cab it shall not be in a position where it is freely accessible to unauthorised persons or it shall be lockable. The actual operation of the coupling from the driving cab may only be possible when inadvertent operation has been precluded, for example by an operation requiring the use of two hands.

It shall be possible to ascertain whether opening of the coupling under remote control has been completed or not.

| 12.3.3. | If remote control involves the coupling being opened by external force, the condition under which the external force acts on the coupling shall be indicated appropriately to the driver. This is not necessary if the external force is only operative while the remote control is operating. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.3.

If remote control involves the coupling being opened by external force, the condition under which the external force acts on the coupling shall be indicated appropriately to the driver. This is not necessary if the external force is only operative while the remote control is operating.

| 12.3.4. | If the actuating device for opening the coupling under remote control is mounted externally on the vehicle it shall be possible to oversee the area between the coupled vehicles, but it shall not be necessary, however, to enter this area in order to operate it. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.4.

If the actuating device for opening the coupling under remote control is mounted externally on the vehicle it shall be possible to oversee the area between the coupled vehicles, but it shall not be necessary, however, to enter this area in order to operate it.

| 12.3.5. | Any single error in operation or the occurrence of any single fault in the system shall not result in accidental opening of the coupling during normal road use. Any faults in the system shall be indicated directly or be immediately obvious at the next operation e.g. by a malfunction. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.5.

Any single error in operation or the occurrence of any single fault in the system shall not result in accidental opening of the coupling during normal road use. Any faults in the system shall be indicated directly or be immediately obvious at the next operation e.g. by a malfunction.

| 12.3.6. | In the event of a failure of the remote control it shall be possible, in an emergency, to open the coupling in at least one other way. If this requires the use of a tool then this shall be included in vehicle's tool kit. The requirements of paragraph 3.6 of this annex are not applicable to hand levers used exclusively for opening the coupling in an emergency. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.6.

In the event of a failure of the remote control it shall be possible, in an emergency, to open the coupling in at least one other way. If this requires the use of a tool then this shall be included in vehicle's tool kit. The requirements of paragraph 3.6 of this annex are not applicable to hand levers used exclusively for opening the coupling in an emergency.

| 12.3.7. | The operating controls and indicators for the remote control devices shall be permanently and clearly identified. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.7.

The operating controls and indicators for the remote control devices shall be permanently and clearly identified.

ANNEX 6

TESTING OF MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICES OR COMPONENTS

1.   GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

| 1.1. | Samples of coupling devices shall be tested for both strength and function. Physical testing shall be carried out wherever possible but unless stated otherwise the type approval authority or technical service may waive a physical strength test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check possible. Theoretical checks may be carried out to determine worst case conditions. In all cases, theoretical checks shall ensure the same quality of results as with dynamic or static testing. In cases of doubt it is the results of physical testing that are overriding.
  See also paragraph 4.8 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Samples of coupling devices shall be tested for both strength and function. Physical testing shall be carried out wherever possible but unless stated otherwise the type approval authority or technical service may waive a physical strength test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check possible. Theoretical checks may be carried out to determine worst case conditions. In all cases, theoretical checks shall ensure the same quality of results as with dynamic or static testing. In cases of doubt it is the results of physical testing that are overriding.

See also paragraph 4.8 of this Regulation.

| 1.2. | With coupling devices the strength shall be verified by a dynamic test (endurance test). In certain cases additional static tests may be necessary (see paragraph 3 of this annex). |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

With coupling devices the strength shall be verified by a dynamic test (endurance test). In certain cases additional static tests may be necessary (see paragraph 3 of this annex).

| 1.3. | The dynamic test shall be performed with approximately sinusoidal load (alternating and/or pulsating) with a number of stress cycles appropriate to the material. No cracks or fractures shall occur. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

The dynamic test shall be performed with approximately sinusoidal load (alternating and/or pulsating) with a number of stress cycles appropriate to the material. No cracks or fractures shall occur.

| 1.4. | Only slight permanent deformation is permitted with the static tests prescribed. Unless stated otherwise the permanent, plastic, deformation after releasing shall not be more than 10 % of the maximum deformation measured during the test. In the case where measurement of deformation during the test puts the tester at risk then, provided that the same parameter is checked during other tests, such as the dynamic test, then this part of the static test may be omitted. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Only slight permanent deformation is permitted with the static tests prescribed. Unless stated otherwise the permanent, plastic, deformation after releasing shall not be more than 10 % of the maximum deformation measured during the test. In the case where measurement of deformation during the test puts the tester at risk then, provided that the same parameter is checked during other tests, such as the dynamic test, then this part of the static test may be omitted.

| 1.5. | The loading assumptions in the dynamic tests are based on the horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the vertical force component. Horizontal force components transverse to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and moments, are not taken into account provided they are of only minor significance.
  If the design of the coupling device or its attachment to the vehicle or the attachment of additional systems (such as stabilisers, close coupling devices, etc.) generate additional forces or moments, additional tests may be required by the type approval authority or technical service.
  The horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle is represented by a theoretically determined reference force, the D or Dc value. The vertical force component, where applicable, is represented by the static vertical bearing load, S, at the point of coupling and the assumed vertical load, V, or by the static vertical bearing load, U, in the case of fifth wheel couplings. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

The loading assumptions in the dynamic tests are based on the horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the vertical force component. Horizontal force components transverse to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and moments, are not taken into account provided they are of only minor significance.

If the design of the coupling device or its attachment to the vehicle or the attachment of additional systems (such as stabilisers, close coupling devices, etc.) generate additional forces or moments, additional tests may be required by the type approval authority or technical service.

The horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle is represented by a theoretically determined reference force, the D or Dc value. The vertical force component, where applicable, is represented by the static vertical bearing load, S, at the point of coupling and the assumed vertical load, V, or by the static vertical bearing load, U, in the case of fifth wheel couplings.

| 1.6. | The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U, on which the tests are based and which are defined in paragraph 2.11. of this Regulation, shall be taken from the manufacturer's information given in the application for type approval — see communication form shown in annexes 1 and 2. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.

The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U, on which the tests are based and which are defined in paragraph 2.11. of this Regulation, shall be taken from the manufacturer's information given in the application for type approval — see communication form shown in annexes 1 and 2.

| 1.7. | Any positive locking device, which is retained in position by spring force, shall remain in its secured position when subjected to a force applied in the least favourable direction and equivalent to three times the mass of the locking mechanism. |
| --- | --- |

1.7.

Any positive locking device, which is retained in position by spring force, shall remain in its secured position when subjected to a force applied in the least favourable direction and equivalent to three times the mass of the locking mechanism.

2.   TEST PROCEDURES

| 2.1. | For the dynamic tests and static tests, the sample shall be placed in a suitable rig with a means of force application, such that it is not subjected to any additional forces or moments apart from the specified test force. In the case of alternating tests, the direction of force application shall not deviate by more than ±1o from the specified direction. In the case of pulsating and static tests, the angle shall be set for the maximum test force. This will normally require a joint at the point of force application (i.e. the point of coupling) and a second joint an adequate distance away. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

For the dynamic tests and static tests, the sample shall be placed in a suitable rig with a means of force application, such that it is not subjected to any additional forces or moments apart from the specified test force. In the case of alternating tests, the direction of force application shall not deviate by more than ±1o from the specified direction. In the case of pulsating and static tests, the angle shall be set for the maximum test force. This will normally require a joint at the point of force application (i.e. the point of coupling) and a second joint an adequate distance away.

| 2.2. | The test frequency shall not exceed 35 Hz. The selected frequency shall be well separated from resonance frequencies of the test set up including the tested device. With asynchronous testing the frequencies of the two force components shall be between approximately 1 per cent and a maximum of 3 per cent apart. For coupling devices made from steel the number of stress cycles is 2 × 106. For devices made from materials other than steel a higher number of cycles may be necessary. The dye‐penetration method of crack testing or an equivalent method shall be used to determine any cracking during test. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

The test frequency shall not exceed 35 Hz. The selected frequency shall be well separated from resonance frequencies of the test set up including the tested device. With asynchronous testing the frequencies of the two force components shall be between approximately 1 per cent and a maximum of 3 per cent apart. For coupling devices made from steel the number of stress cycles is 2 × 106. For devices made from materials other than steel a higher number of cycles may be necessary. The dye‐penetration method of crack testing or an equivalent method shall be used to determine any cracking during test.

| 2.3. | With pulsating tests, the test force varies between the maximum test force and a lower, minimum, test force, which may not be greater than 5 per cent of the maximum test force unless otherwise stated in the specific testing procedure. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

With pulsating tests, the test force varies between the maximum test force and a lower, minimum, test force, which may not be greater than 5 per cent of the maximum test force unless otherwise stated in the specific testing procedure.

| 2.4. | With static tests, other than the special tests required by paragraph 3.2.3 of this annex, the test force shall be applied smoothly and quickly and be maintained for at least 60 seconds. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

With static tests, other than the special tests required by paragraph 3.2.3 of this annex, the test force shall be applied smoothly and quickly and be maintained for at least 60 seconds.

| 2.5. | The coupling devices or component on test should normally be mounted as rigidly as possible on a test rig in the actual position in which they will be used on the vehicle. The fixing devices should be those specified by the manufacturer or applicant and should be those intended for the attachment of the coupling device or component to the vehicle and/or shall have identical mechanical characteristics. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

The coupling devices or component on test should normally be mounted as rigidly as possible on a test rig in the actual position in which they will be used on the vehicle. The fixing devices should be those specified by the manufacturer or applicant and should be those intended for the attachment of the coupling device or component to the vehicle and/or shall have identical mechanical characteristics.

| 2.6. | Coupling devices or components shall be tested in the form used on the road. However, at the discretion of the manufacturer, and in agreement with the technical service, flexible components may be neutralised if this is necessary for the test procedure and if this will not have any unrealistic influence on the test result.
  Flexible components which are overheated during these accelerated test procedures may be replaced during the test. The test loads may be applied by means of special slack‐free devices. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

Coupling devices or components shall be tested in the form used on the road. However, at the discretion of the manufacturer, and in agreement with the technical service, flexible components may be neutralised if this is necessary for the test procedure and if this will not have any unrealistic influence on the test result.

Flexible components which are overheated during these accelerated test procedures may be replaced during the test. The test loads may be applied by means of special slack‐free devices.

3.   SPECIFIC TESTING REQUIREMENTS

| 3.1. | Coupling balls and towing brackets |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

Coupling balls and towing brackets

| 3.1.1. | Mechanical coupling devices with coupling balls may be of the following types:






  (i) | one‐piece coupling balls including devices with noninterchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b), |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.1.1.

Mechanical coupling devices with coupling balls may be of the following types:

(i)

one‐piece coupling balls including devices with noninterchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b),

| (ii) | coupling balls, comprising a number of parts which can be dismantled (see Figures 20c, 20d and 20e), |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

coupling balls, comprising a number of parts which can be dismantled (see Figures 20c, 20d and 20e),

| (iii) | towing brackets without ball fitted (see Figure 20f). |
| --- | --- |

(iii)

towing brackets without ball fitted (see Figure 20f).

Figure 20

Arrangements of ball type towing brackets

Image

| 3.1.2. | The basic test is a dynamic endurance test. The test sample comprises the coupling ball, the ball neck and the mountings necessary for attaching the assembly to the vehicle. The coupling ball and towing bracket shall be rigidly mounted to a test rig, capable of producing an alternating force, in the actual position in which it is intended for use. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

The basic test is a dynamic endurance test. The test sample comprises the coupling ball, the ball neck and the mountings necessary for attaching the assembly to the vehicle. The coupling ball and towing bracket shall be rigidly mounted to a test rig, capable of producing an alternating force, in the actual position in which it is intended for use.

| 3.1.3. | The positions of the fixing points for attaching the coupling ball and towing bracket are specified by the vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 5.3.2 of this Regulation). |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

The positions of the fixing points for attaching the coupling ball and towing bracket are specified by the vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 5.3.2 of this Regulation).

| 3.1.4. | The devices submitted for test shall be provided with all parts and design details which may have an influence on the strength criteria (for example electrical socket plate, any marking, etc.). The test sample shall include all parts up to the anchorage points or fitting points to the vehicle. The geometric location of the coupling ball and the fixing points of the coupling device related to the reference line shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be shown in the test report. All relative positions of the anchorage points with respect to the reference line, for which the towing vehicle manufacturer shall provide all the necessary information to the towing device manufacturer, shall be repeated on the test bed. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.4.

The devices submitted for test shall be provided with all parts and design details which may have an influence on the strength criteria (for example electrical socket plate, any marking, etc.). The test sample shall include all parts up to the anchorage points or fitting points to the vehicle. The geometric location of the coupling ball and the fixing points of the coupling device related to the reference line shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be shown in the test report. All relative positions of the anchorage points with respect to the reference line, for which the towing vehicle manufacturer shall provide all the necessary information to the towing device manufacturer, shall be repeated on the test bed.

| 3.1.5. | The sample mounted on the test rig shall be subjected to an alternating stress test applied at an angle to the ball as shown in Figure 21 or 22.
  The direction of the angle of test shall be determined by the vertical relationship between a horizontal reference line passing through the centre of the ball and a horizontal line passing through the fixing point of the coupling device which is the highest of the nearest, when measured in a horizontal plane, to a transverse vertical plane passing through the centre of the ball. If the fixing point line is above the horizontal reference line, the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = + 15o ±1o and if it is below then the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = -15o ±1o (see Figure 21). The fixing points to be considered in determining the angle of test shall be those declared by the vehicle manufacturer and which transmit the major towing forces to the structure of the towing vehicle.
  This angle is chosen in order to take account of the vertical static and dynamic load and is only applicable for a permitted static vertical load not exceeding:
  S = 120 × D [N]
  Where the static vertical load exceeds that calculated above, the angle shall, in both conditions, be increased to 20o.
  The dynamic test shall be performed with the following test force:
  Fhs res = ±0.6 D |
| --- | --- |

3.1.5.

The sample mounted on the test rig shall be subjected to an alternating stress test applied at an angle to the ball as shown in Figure 21 or 22.

The direction of the angle of test shall be determined by the vertical relationship between a horizontal reference line passing through the centre of the ball and a horizontal line passing through the fixing point of the coupling device which is the highest of the nearest, when measured in a horizontal plane, to a transverse vertical plane passing through the centre of the ball. If the fixing point line is above the horizontal reference line, the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = + 15o ±1o and if it is below then the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = -15o ±1o (see Figure 21). The fixing points to be considered in determining the angle of test shall be those declared by the vehicle manufacturer and which transmit the major towing forces to the structure of the towing vehicle.

This angle is chosen in order to take account of the vertical static and dynamic load and is only applicable for a permitted static vertical load not exceeding:

S = 120 × D [N]

Where the static vertical load exceeds that calculated above, the angle shall, in both conditions, be increased to 20o.

The dynamic test shall be performed with the following test force:

Fhs res = ±0.6 D

| 3.1.6. | The test procedure is applicable to the different types of coupling devices (see paragraph 3.1.1 of this annex) as follows: |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.

The test procedure is applicable to the different types of coupling devices (see paragraph 3.1.1 of this annex) as follows:

| 3.1.6.1. | one piece coupling balls including devices with non‐interchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b). |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.1.

one piece coupling balls including devices with non‐interchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b).

| 3.1.6.1.1. | the strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20a and 20b shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.1.1.

the strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20a and 20b shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5;

Figure 21

Angles of application of test force

Image

Figure 22

Angles of application of test force

Image

| 3.1.6.2. | coupling balls, comprising parts which can be dismantled.
  The following categories are defined:






  (a) | towing bracket and ball (see Figure 20c), |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.1.6.2.

coupling balls, comprising parts which can be dismantled.

The following categories are defined:

(a)

towing bracket and ball (see Figure 20c),

| (b) | towing bracket and ball on integral support (see Figure 20d), |
| --- | --- |

(b)

towing bracket and ball on integral support (see Figure 20d),

| (c) | towing bracket with detachable ball (see Figure 20e), |
| --- | --- |

(c)

towing bracket with detachable ball (see Figure 20e),

| (d) | towing bracket without ball (see Figure 20f). |
| --- | --- |

(d)

towing bracket without ball (see Figure 20f).

| 3.1.6.2.1. | The strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20c to 20f shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5. Dimensions e and f, shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm, and shall be stated in the test report.
  The test of the towing bracket (see Figure 20f) shall be carried out with a mounted ball (on support). Account will be taken only of the result of the test on the towing bracket between the fixing points and the mounting surface of the ball support.
  The dimensions e and f shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm and shall be specified by the coupling device manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.2.1.

The strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20c to 20f shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5. Dimensions e and f, shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm, and shall be stated in the test report.

The test of the towing bracket (see Figure 20f) shall be carried out with a mounted ball (on support). Account will be taken only of the result of the test on the towing bracket between the fixing points and the mounting surface of the ball support.

The dimensions e and f shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm and shall be specified by the coupling device manufacturer.

| 3.1.6.3. | Coupling devices with variable dimensions e and f for demountable and interchangeable coupling balls — see Figure 22. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.

Coupling devices with variable dimensions e and f for demountable and interchangeable coupling balls — see Figure 22.

| 3.1.6.3.1. | The strength tests for such towing brackets shall be carried out to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.1.

The strength tests for such towing brackets shall be carried out to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5.

| 3.1.6.3.2. | If a worst case configuration can be defined by agreement between the manufacturer and the type approval authority or technical service, then testing of this one configuration alone shall be sufficient.
  Otherwise, several ball positions shall be tested in a simplified test programme according to paragraph 3.1.6.3.3. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.2.

If a worst case configuration can be defined by agreement between the manufacturer and the type approval authority or technical service, then testing of this one configuration alone shall be sufficient.

Otherwise, several ball positions shall be tested in a simplified test programme according to paragraph 3.1.6.3.3.

| 3.1.6.3.3. | In a simplified test programme, the value for f shall be between a defined value of fmin and a value of fmax which does not exceed 100 mm. The ball shall be at a distance, emax, of 130 mm from the support. To cover all possible positions of the ball, in the field given by the horizontal distance from the mounting surface and the vertical range of f (fmin to fmax), two devices are to be tested:






  (i) | one with a ball in the upper (fmax) position, and |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.3.

In a simplified test programme, the value for f shall be between a defined value of fmin and a value of fmax which does not exceed 100 mm. The ball shall be at a distance, emax, of 130 mm from the support. To cover all possible positions of the ball, in the field given by the horizontal distance from the mounting surface and the vertical range of f (fmin to fmax), two devices are to be tested:

(i)

one with a ball in the upper (fmax) position, and

| (ii) | one with a ball in the lower (fmin) position. |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

one with a ball in the lower (fmin) position.

The angle of application of the test force will vary, positive or negative, depending on the relationship of the ball centre horizontal reference line to the parallel line passing through the highest and nearest coupling device fixing point. The angles to be used are shown in Figure 22.

| 3.1.7. | In the case where detachable ball units are retained using fixing arrangements other than screwed fittings, for example, spring clips, and where the positive mechanical engagement aspect of the arrangement is not tested during the dynamic test, then the arrangement shall be subject to a static test applied to the ball or to the positive mechanical engagement arrangement in an appropriate direction. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit vertically, the static test shall be to apply an upwards vertical force to the ball equivalent to the “D” value. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit by means of a transverse horizontal design, the static test shall be to apply a force in this direction equivalent to 0,25 D. There shall not be any failure of the positive mechanical engagement device or any distortion likely to have an adverse effect on its function. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.7.

In the case where detachable ball units are retained using fixing arrangements other than screwed fittings, for example, spring clips, and where the positive mechanical engagement aspect of the arrangement is not tested during the dynamic test, then the arrangement shall be subject to a static test applied to the ball or to the positive mechanical engagement arrangement in an appropriate direction. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit vertically, the static test shall be to apply an upwards vertical force to the ball equivalent to the “D” value. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit by means of a transverse horizontal design, the static test shall be to apply a force in this direction equivalent to 0,25 D. There shall not be any failure of the positive mechanical engagement device or any distortion likely to have an adverse effect on its function.

| 3.1.8. | The attachment points for the secondary coupling referred to in annex 5, paragraph 1.5 shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to 2D with a maximum of 15 kN. Where there is a separate attachment point for a breakaway cable this shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to D. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.8.

The attachment points for the secondary coupling referred to in annex 5, paragraph 1.5 shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to 2D with a maximum of 15 kN. Where there is a separate attachment point for a breakaway cable this shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to D.

| 3.2. | Coupling heads |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

Coupling heads

| 3.2.1. | The basic test is an endurance test using an alternating test force followed by a static test (lifting test) on the same test sample. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

The basic test is an endurance test using an alternating test force followed by a static test (lifting test) on the same test sample.

| 3.2.2. | The dynamic test shall be performed with a Class A coupling ball of appropriate strength. On the test rig the coupling ball and coupling head shall be arranged as instructed by the manufacturer and orientated in a way corresponding to the relative positions in normal use. There should be no possibility of extra forces in addition to the test force acting on the specimen. The test force shall be applied along a line passing through the centre of the ball and inclined downwards to the rear at 15o (see Figure 23). An endurance test must be performed on a test specimen with the following test force:
  Fhs res w = ±0,6 D
  Where the maximum permissible static vertical mass, S, exceeds 120 D, then the angle of test shall be increased to 20o. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

The dynamic test shall be performed with a Class A coupling ball of appropriate strength. On the test rig the coupling ball and coupling head shall be arranged as instructed by the manufacturer and orientated in a way corresponding to the relative positions in normal use. There should be no possibility of extra forces in addition to the test force acting on the specimen. The test force shall be applied along a line passing through the centre of the ball and inclined downwards to the rear at 15o (see Figure 23). An endurance test must be performed on a test specimen with the following test force:

Fhs res w = ±0,6 D

Where the maximum permissible static vertical mass, S, exceeds 120 D, then the angle of test shall be increased to 20o.

Figure 23

Dynamic test

Image

| 3.2.3. | A static separation test shall also be performed. The coupling ball used for the test shall have a diameter of 49,00 to 49,13 mm in order to represent a worn coupling ball. The separation force, Fa, shall be applied perpendicular to both the transverse and longitudinal centre line axes of the coupling head and shall be increased smoothly and quickly to a value of:
  Fa = g(C+ S/1 000)kN
  and be held for 10 seconds.
  The coupling head shall not separate from the ball nor shall any component of the coupling head exhibit any permanent distortion which could have an adverse effect on its functional capability. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

A static separation test shall also be performed. The coupling ball used for the test shall have a diameter of 49,00 to 49,13 mm in order to represent a worn coupling ball. The separation force, Fa, shall be applied perpendicular to both the transverse and longitudinal centre line axes of the coupling head and shall be increased smoothly and quickly to a value of:

Fa = g(C+ S/1 000)kN

and be held for 10 seconds.

The coupling head shall not separate from the ball nor shall any component of the coupling head exhibit any permanent distortion which could have an adverse effect on its functional capability.

| 3.3. | Drawbar couplings and drawbeams |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

Drawbar couplings and drawbeams

| 3.3.1. | An endurance test shall be performed on a test sample. The coupling device shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. Any intermediate devices fitted between the drawbar couplings and the vehicle frame (i.e. drawbeams) shall be tested with the same forces as the coupling. When testing drawbeams intended for standard drawbar couplings, the vertical load shall be applied at a longitudinal distance from the vertical plane of the fixing points that is equal to the position of the corresponding standard coupling. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.1.

An endurance test shall be performed on a test sample. The coupling device shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. Any intermediate devices fitted between the drawbar couplings and the vehicle frame (i.e. drawbeams) shall be tested with the same forces as the coupling. When testing drawbeams intended for standard drawbar couplings, the vertical load shall be applied at a longitudinal distance from the vertical plane of the fixing points that is equal to the position of the corresponding standard coupling.

| 3.3.2. | Drawbar couplings for hinged drawbars (S=0)
  The dynamic test shall be performed with a horizontal alternating force of Fhw = ±0,6 D acting in a line parallel to the ground and in the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle passing through the centre of the coupling pin. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.2.

Drawbar couplings for hinged drawbars (S=0)

The dynamic test shall be performed with a horizontal alternating force of Fhw = ±0,6 D acting in a line parallel to the ground and in the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle passing through the centre of the coupling pin.

| 3.3.3. | Drawbar couplings for use with centre‐axle trailers (S>0). |
| --- | --- |

3.3.3.

Drawbar couplings for use with centre‐axle trailers (S>0).

| 3.3.3.1. | Centre axle trailer masses up to and including 3,5 tonnes:
  Drawbar couplings for use with centre axle trailers up to and including a mass of 3,5 tonnes shall be tested in the same way as coupling balls and towing brackets described in 3.1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.3.1.

Centre axle trailer masses up to and including 3,5 tonnes:

Drawbar couplings for use with centre axle trailers up to and including a mass of 3,5 tonnes shall be tested in the same way as coupling balls and towing brackets described in 3.1 of this annex.

| 3.3.3.2. | Centre axle trailer masses exceeding 3,5 tonnes:
  The test forces are applied to the specimen in both horizontal and vertical directions in an asynchronous endurance test. The horizontal line of action shall be equivalent to being parallel to the ground and along the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle and pass through the centre of the coupling pin. The vertical line of action shall be perpendicular to the horizontal line of action and shall act along the longitudinal centre line of the coupling pin.
  The fixing arrangements for the drawbar coupling and the drawbar eye on the test rig shall be those intended for its attachment to the vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer's fitting instructions.
  The following test forces shall be applied:
  Table 14
  Test forces







  Test Force | Mean value (kN) | Amplitude (kN) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Horizontal Force | 0 | ±0,6 Dc (see note) |
| Vertical Force | S x g/1 000 | ±0,6 V (see note) |
| Note: In the case of Class T dedicated drawbar couplings these values shall be reduced to ±0,5Dc and ±0,5V. |

3.3.3.2.

Centre axle trailer masses exceeding 3,5 tonnes:

The test forces are applied to the specimen in both horizontal and vertical directions in an asynchronous endurance test. The horizontal line of action shall be equivalent to being parallel to the ground and along the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle and pass through the centre of the coupling pin. The vertical line of action shall be perpendicular to the horizontal line of action and shall act along the longitudinal centre line of the coupling pin.

The fixing arrangements for the drawbar coupling and the drawbar eye on the test rig shall be those intended for its attachment to the vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer's fitting instructions.

The following test forces shall be applied:

Table 14

Test forces

Test Force

Mean value (kN)

Amplitude (kN)

Horizontal Force

0

±0,6 Dc (see note)

Vertical Force

S x g/1 000

±0,6 V (see note)

Note: In the case of Class T dedicated drawbar couplings these values shall be reduced to ±0,5Dc and ±0,5V.

The vertical and the horizontal components shall be sinusoidal in shape and shall be applied asynchronously, where the difference of their frequencies shall be between 1 per cent and 3 per cent.

| 3.3.4. | Static test on coupling pin locking device
  With drawbar couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage. A test force of 0,1 D is sufficient in the case of cylindrical coupling pins. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.4.

Static test on coupling pin locking device

With drawbar couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage. A test force of 0,1 D is sufficient in the case of cylindrical coupling pins.

| 3.4. | Drawbar eyes |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

Drawbar eyes

| 3.4.1. | Drawbar eyes shall be subjected to the same dynamic testing as drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes used solely for trailers having hinged drawbars allowing free vertical movement shall be subjected to an alternating force as described in paragraph 3.3.2. Drawbar eyes also intended for use on centre axle trailers shall be tested in the same way as ball coupling heads (paragraph 3.2) for trailer masses C up to and including 3,5 tonnes and in the same way as drawbar couplings (paragraph 3.3.3.2.) for centre axle trailers with a mass, C, exceeding 3,5 tonnes. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1.

Drawbar eyes shall be subjected to the same dynamic testing as drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes used solely for trailers having hinged drawbars allowing free vertical movement shall be subjected to an alternating force as described in paragraph 3.3.2. Drawbar eyes also intended for use on centre axle trailers shall be tested in the same way as ball coupling heads (paragraph 3.2) for trailer masses C up to and including 3,5 tonnes and in the same way as drawbar couplings (paragraph 3.3.3.2.) for centre axle trailers with a mass, C, exceeding 3,5 tonnes.

| 3.4.2. | Toroidal eyes of Class L shall be tested in the same manner as standard drawbar eyes. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.2.

Toroidal eyes of Class L shall be tested in the same manner as standard drawbar eyes.

| 3.4.3. | The testing of drawbar eyes shall be conducted in such a manner that the alternating force also acts on the parts used for attaching the drawbar eye to the drawbar. All flexible intermediate components shall be clamped. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.3.

The testing of drawbar eyes shall be conducted in such a manner that the alternating force also acts on the parts used for attaching the drawbar eye to the drawbar. All flexible intermediate components shall be clamped.

| 3.5. | Hook type couplings |
| --- | --- |

3.5.

Hook type couplings

| 3.5.1. | Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the dynamic test given in paragraph 3.5.2 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.1.

Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the dynamic test given in paragraph 3.5.2 of this annex.

| 3.5.2. | Dynamic test: |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.

Dynamic test:

| 3.5.2.1. | The dynamic test shall be a pulsating test using a Class L toroidal eye and with the coupling mounted as it would be on a vehicle and with all of the necessary parts for vehicle installation. However, any flexible components may be neutralised with the agreement of the type approval authority or technical service; |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.1.

The dynamic test shall be a pulsating test using a Class L toroidal eye and with the coupling mounted as it would be on a vehicle and with all of the necessary parts for vehicle installation. However, any flexible components may be neutralised with the agreement of the type approval authority or technical service;

| 3.5.2.2. | For hook type couplings intended for use with hinged drawbar trailers, where the imposed vertical load on the coupling, S, is zero, the test force shall be applied in a horizontal direction simulating a tensile force on the hook and varying between 0,05 D and 1,00 D; |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.2.

For hook type couplings intended for use with hinged drawbar trailers, where the imposed vertical load on the coupling, S, is zero, the test force shall be applied in a horizontal direction simulating a tensile force on the hook and varying between 0,05 D and 1,00 D;

| 3.5.2.3. | For hook type couplings intended for use with centre axle trailers the test force shall represent the resultant of the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling and shall be applied along an angle, -α, that is, from top front to bottom rear (see Figure 21), and equivalent to the calculated angle of the resultant between the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling.
  The force, Fhs res shall be calculated as:

  Fhs res
  = sq . rt(Fh

  2 + Fs

  2) ,
  where Fh
  = Dc
  and Fs
  = (9,81S)/1 000 + 0,8V |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.3.

For hook type couplings intended for use with centre axle trailers the test force shall represent the resultant of the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling and shall be applied along an angle, -α, that is, from top front to bottom rear (see Figure 21), and equivalent to the calculated angle of the resultant between the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling.

The force, Fhs res shall be calculated as:

Fhs res
  = sq . rt(Fh

  2 + Fs

  2) ,

where Fh
  = Dc
  and Fs
  = (9,81S)/1 000 + 0,8V

| 3.5.2.4. | The applied force shall vary between and . 0,05Fhs res
  1,00Fhs res |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.4.

The applied force shall vary between and . 0,05Fhs res
  1,00Fhs res

| 3.5.3. | Static test on coupling locking device With hook type couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.3.

Static test on coupling locking device With hook type couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage.

| 3.6. | Drawbars |
| --- | --- |

3.6.

Drawbars

| 3.6.1. | Drawbars shall be tested in the same way as drawbar eyes (see paragraph 3.4.). The type approval authority or technical service may waive an endurance test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check of its strength possible. The design forces for the theoretical verification of the drawbar of centre axle trailers with a mass, C, of up to and including 3,5 tonnes shall be taken from ISO 7641/1: 1983. The design forces for the theoretical verification of drawbars for centre axle trailers having a mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be calculated as follows:
  Fsp = (g × S/1 000) + V
  where the force amplitude V is that given in paragraph 2.11.4 of this Regulation.
  The permissible stresses based on the design masses for trailers having a total mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983. For bent drawbars (e.g. swan neck) and for the drawbars of full trailers, the horizontal force component Fhp = 1,0 × D shall be taken into consideration. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.1.

Drawbars shall be tested in the same way as drawbar eyes (see paragraph 3.4.). The type approval authority or technical service may waive an endurance test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check of its strength possible. The design forces for the theoretical verification of the drawbar of centre axle trailers with a mass, C, of up to and including 3,5 tonnes shall be taken from ISO 7641/1: 1983. The design forces for the theoretical verification of drawbars for centre axle trailers having a mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be calculated as follows:

Fsp = (g × S/1 000) + V

where the force amplitude V is that given in paragraph 2.11.4 of this Regulation.

The permissible stresses based on the design masses for trailers having a total mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983. For bent drawbars (e.g. swan neck) and for the drawbars of full trailers, the horizontal force component Fhp = 1,0 × D shall be taken into consideration.

| 3.6.2. | For drawbars for full trailers with free movement in the vertical plane, in addition to the endurance test or theoretical verification of strength, the resistance to buckling shall be verified either by a theoretical calculation with a design force of 3,0 × D or by a buckling test with a force of 3,0 × D. The permissible stresses in the case of calculation shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.2.

For drawbars for full trailers with free movement in the vertical plane, in addition to the endurance test or theoretical verification of strength, the resistance to buckling shall be verified either by a theoretical calculation with a design force of 3,0 × D or by a buckling test with a force of 3,0 × D. The permissible stresses in the case of calculation shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983.

| 3.6.3. | In the case of steered axles, the resistance to bending shall be verified by theoretical calculations or by a bending test. A horizontal, lateral static force shall be applied in the centre of the coupling point. The magnitude of this force shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,6 × Av × g (kNm) is exerted about the front axle centre. The permissible stresses shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983.
  However, in the case where the steered axles form a twin, tandem, axle front carriage (steered bogie) the moment shall be increased to 0,95 × Av × g (kNm) |
| --- | --- |

3.6.3.

In the case of steered axles, the resistance to bending shall be verified by theoretical calculations or by a bending test. A horizontal, lateral static force shall be applied in the centre of the coupling point. The magnitude of this force shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,6 × Av × g (kNm) is exerted about the front axle centre. The permissible stresses shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983.

However, in the case where the steered axles form a twin, tandem, axle front carriage (steered bogie) the moment shall be increased to 0,95 × Av × g (kNm)

| 3.7. | Fifth wheel couplings |
| --- | --- |

3.7.

Fifth wheel couplings

| 3.7.1. | The basic strength tests are a dynamic test and a static test (lifting test). Fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be subject to an additional static test (bending test). For the purpose of the tests the fifth wheel coupling shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. The method of mounting shall be identical to that employed on the vehicle itself. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.1.

The basic strength tests are a dynamic test and a static test (lifting test). Fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be subject to an additional static test (bending test). For the purpose of the tests the fifth wheel coupling shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. The method of mounting shall be identical to that employed on the vehicle itself. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing.

| 3.7.2. | Static tests |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.

Static tests

| 3.7.2.1. | Standard fifth wheel couplings designed for a steering wedge or similar device for the positive steering of semitrailers (see paragraph 2.7 of this Regulation) shall be tested for adequate strength by means of a static bending test within the working range of the steering device with the simultaneous application of fifth wheel load. The maximum permitted imposed vertical load, U, for the fifth wheel shall be applied vertically to the coupling in its operating position by means of a rigid plate of sufficient size to cover the coupling completely.
  The resultant of the applied load shall pass through the centre of the horizontal joint of the fifth wheel coupling.
  Simultaneously, a horizontal lateral force, representing the force needed for positive steering of the semitrailer, shall be applied to the flanks of the guide for the coupling pin. The magnitude of this force and the direction in which it acts shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,75m × D is exerted about the centre of the coupling pin by means of a force acting on a lever arm 0,5 m ± 0,1 m long. Permanent, plastic deformation up to 0,5 per cent of all nominal dimensions is permitted. There shall not be any cracking. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.1.

Standard fifth wheel couplings designed for a steering wedge or similar device for the positive steering of semitrailers (see paragraph 2.7 of this Regulation) shall be tested for adequate strength by means of a static bending test within the working range of the steering device with the simultaneous application of fifth wheel load. The maximum permitted imposed vertical load, U, for the fifth wheel shall be applied vertically to the coupling in its operating position by means of a rigid plate of sufficient size to cover the coupling completely.

The resultant of the applied load shall pass through the centre of the horizontal joint of the fifth wheel coupling.

Simultaneously, a horizontal lateral force, representing the force needed for positive steering of the semitrailer, shall be applied to the flanks of the guide for the coupling pin. The magnitude of this force and the direction in which it acts shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,75m × D is exerted about the centre of the coupling pin by means of a force acting on a lever arm 0,5 m ± 0,1 m long. Permanent, plastic deformation up to 0,5 per cent of all nominal dimensions is permitted. There shall not be any cracking.

| 3.7.2.2. | A static lifting test shall be performed on all fifth wheel couplings. Up to a lifting force of Fa = g.U there shall not be any major permanent bending of the coupling plate over more than 0,2 per cent of its width.
  In the case of Class G50 standard fifth wheel couplings and comparable couplings for the same coupling pin diameter, there shall not be any separation of the coupling pin from the coupling with a lifting force of Fa = g × 2,5 U. In the case of non‐standard couplings using a pin diameter greater than 50 mm, for example 90 mm pin diameter couplings, the lifting force shall be: Fa = g × 1,6 U with a minimum value of 500 kN.
  The force shall be applied by means of a lever bearing on the coupling plate at one end and being raised at the other end at a distance of 1,0 to 1,5 m from the centre of the coupling pin — see Figure 24.
  The lever arm shall be at 90o to the direction of entry of the coupling pin into the coupling. If the worst case is obvious, this worst case has to be tested. If the worst case is not easy to determine, the type approval authority or technical service shall decide which side to test. Only one test is necessary. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.2.

A static lifting test shall be performed on all fifth wheel couplings. Up to a lifting force of Fa = g.U there shall not be any major permanent bending of the coupling plate over more than 0,2 per cent of its width.

In the case of Class G50 standard fifth wheel couplings and comparable couplings for the same coupling pin diameter, there shall not be any separation of the coupling pin from the coupling with a lifting force of Fa = g × 2,5 U. In the case of non‐standard couplings using a pin diameter greater than 50 mm, for example 90 mm pin diameter couplings, the lifting force shall be: Fa = g × 1,6 U with a minimum value of 500 kN.

The force shall be applied by means of a lever bearing on the coupling plate at one end and being raised at the other end at a distance of 1,0 to 1,5 m from the centre of the coupling pin — see Figure 24.

The lever arm shall be at 90o to the direction of entry of the coupling pin into the coupling. If the worst case is obvious, this worst case has to be tested. If the worst case is not easy to determine, the type approval authority or technical service shall decide which side to test. Only one test is necessary.

Figure 24

Lifting test on fifth wheel couplings

Image

| 3.7.3. | Dynamic test
  The fifth wheel coupling shall be subjected to alternating stress on a test rig (asynchronous dynamic test) with horizontal alternating and vertical pulsating forces acting simultaneously. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.

Dynamic test

The fifth wheel coupling shall be subjected to alternating stress on a test rig (asynchronous dynamic test) with horizontal alternating and vertical pulsating forces acting simultaneously.

| 3.7.3.1. | In the case of fifth wheel couplings not intended for the positive steering of semitrailers, the following forces shall be used:






  Horizontal: | Fhw = ±0,6 × D |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Vertical: | Fso = g × 1,2 U
  Fsu = g × 0,4 U |

3.7.3.1.

In the case of fifth wheel couplings not intended for the positive steering of semitrailers, the following forces shall be used:

Horizontal:

Fhw = ±0,6 × D

Vertical:

Fso = g × 1,2 U

Fsu = g × 0,4 U

These two forces shall be applied in the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle with the lines of action of both forces Fso and Fsu passing through the centre of the joint of the coupling.

The vertical force Fs alternates between the limits +g × 1,2 U and +g × 0,4 U and the horizontal force between ±0,6 D.

| 3.7.3.2. | In the case of fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers the following forces shall be used:
  Horizontal: Fhw = ±0,675 D
  Vertical: Fso and Fsu as in paragraph 3.7.3.1.
  The lines of action of the forces are as given in paragraph 3.7.3.1. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.2.

In the case of fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers the following forces shall be used:

Horizontal: Fhw = ±0,675 D

Vertical: Fso and Fsu as in paragraph 3.7.3.1.

The lines of action of the forces are as given in paragraph 3.7.3.1.

| 3.7.3.3. | For the dynamic test of fifth wheel couplings, a suitable lubricating material shall be placed between the coupling plate and the trailer plate so that the maximum coefficient of friction, μ ≤ 0,15. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.3.

For the dynamic test of fifth wheel couplings, a suitable lubricating material shall be placed between the coupling plate and the trailer plate so that the maximum coefficient of friction, μ ≤ 0,15.

| 3.8. | Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings
  The dynamic test for fifth wheel couplings described in paragraph 3.7.3 and the static tests described in paragraph 3.7.2 shall also be applied to mounting plates. With mounting plates, it is sufficient to perform the lifting test on one side only. The test shall be based on the maximum designated installation height for the coupling, the maximum designated width and the minimum designated length of the mounting plate design. It is not necessary to carry out this test if the mounting plate in question is identical to one which has already undergone this test except that it is narrower and/or longer and the total height is lower. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing. |
| --- | --- |

3.8.

Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings

The dynamic test for fifth wheel couplings described in paragraph 3.7.3 and the static tests described in paragraph 3.7.2 shall also be applied to mounting plates. With mounting plates, it is sufficient to perform the lifting test on one side only. The test shall be based on the maximum designated installation height for the coupling, the maximum designated width and the minimum designated length of the mounting plate design. It is not necessary to carry out this test if the mounting plate in question is identical to one which has already undergone this test except that it is narrower and/or longer and the total height is lower. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing.

| 3.9. | Fifth wheel coupling pins of semitrailers |
| --- | --- |

3.9.

Fifth wheel coupling pins of semitrailers

| 3.9.1. | A dynamic test with alternating stress shall be performed on a sample mounted on a test rig. The testing of the coupling pin shall not be combined with the testing of the fifth wheel coupling. The test shall be conducted so that the force is also applied to the fixings needed for attaching the coupling pin to the semitrailer. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing. |
| --- | --- |

3.9.1.

A dynamic test with alternating stress shall be performed on a sample mounted on a test rig. The testing of the coupling pin shall not be combined with the testing of the fifth wheel coupling. The test shall be conducted so that the force is also applied to the fixings needed for attaching the coupling pin to the semitrailer. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing.

| 3.9.2. | A dynamic test with an alternating horizontal force of Fhw = ±0,6 D shall be applied to the coupling pin in the operating position.
  The line of action of the force shall pass through the centre of the smallest diameter of the cylindrical part of the coupling pin having a diameter of 50,8 mm for Class H50 (see annex 5, Figure 18). |
| --- | --- |

3.9.2.

A dynamic test with an alternating horizontal force of Fhw = ±0,6 D shall be applied to the coupling pin in the operating position.

The line of action of the force shall pass through the centre of the smallest diameter of the cylindrical part of the coupling pin having a diameter of 50,8 mm for Class H50 (see annex 5, Figure 18).

ANNEX 7

INSTALLATION AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

1.   INSTALLATION AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

| 1.1. | Attachment of coupling balls and towing brackets |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Attachment of coupling balls and towing brackets

| 1.1.1. | Coupling balls and towing brackets shall be attached to vehicles of categories M1, M2 (below 3,5 t maximum permissible mass) and N1
   (1) in a manner which conforms to the clearance and height dimensions given in Figure 25. The height shall be measured at the vehicle loading conditions given in appendix 1 to this annex.
  The height requirement shall not apply in the case of category G off‐road vehicles as defined in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3)(document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2). |
| --- | --- |

1.1.1.

Coupling balls and towing brackets shall be attached to vehicles of categories M1, M2 (below 3,5 t maximum permissible mass) and N1
   (1) in a manner which conforms to the clearance and height dimensions given in Figure 25. The height shall be measured at the vehicle loading conditions given in appendix 1 to this annex.

The height requirement shall not apply in the case of category G off‐road vehicles as defined in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3)(document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

| 1.1.1.1. | The clearance space shown in Figures 25a and 25b may be occupied by non‐demountable equipment, such as a spare wheel, provided that the distance from the centre of the ball to a vertical plane at the extreme rearmost point of the equipment does not exceed 300 mm. The equipment shall be mounted to allow adequate access for coupling and uncoupling without risk of injury to the user and without affecting articulation of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.1.1.

The clearance space shown in Figures 25a and 25b may be occupied by non‐demountable equipment, such as a spare wheel, provided that the distance from the centre of the ball to a vertical plane at the extreme rearmost point of the equipment does not exceed 300 mm. The equipment shall be mounted to allow adequate access for coupling and uncoupling without risk of injury to the user and without affecting articulation of the coupling.

| 1.1.2. | For coupling balls and towing brackets the vehicle manufacturer shall supply mounting instructions and state whether any reinforcement of the fixing area is necessary. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.2.

For coupling balls and towing brackets the vehicle manufacturer shall supply mounting instructions and state whether any reinforcement of the fixing area is necessary.

| 1.1.3. | It shall be possible to couple and uncouple ball couplings when the longitudinal axis of the ball coupling in relation to the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting:
  is rotated horizontally 60o to right or left, (β = 60o, see Figure 25);
  is rotated vertically 10o up or down (α = 10o, see Figure 25);
  is rotated axially 10o to right or left. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.3.

It shall be possible to couple and uncouple ball couplings when the longitudinal axis of the ball coupling in relation to the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting:

is rotated horizontally 60o to right or left, (β = 60o, see Figure 25);

is rotated vertically 10o up or down (α = 10o, see Figure 25);

is rotated axially 10o to right or left.

Figure 25(a)

Clearance space for, and height of, coupling ball — side view

Image

Figure 25(b)

Clearance space for coupling ball — plan view

Image

| 1.1.4. | When the trailer is not coupled to the towing vehicle, the mounted towing bracket and coupling ball shall not obscure the mounting space provided for the rear registration plate or affect the visibility of the rear registration/licence plate of the towing vehicle. If the coupling ball or other items do obscure the rear registration plate they shall be removable or repositionable without the use of tools except, for example, an easily operated (i.e. an effort not exceeding 20 Nm) release key which is carried in the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.4.

When the trailer is not coupled to the towing vehicle, the mounted towing bracket and coupling ball shall not obscure the mounting space provided for the rear registration plate or affect the visibility of the rear registration/licence plate of the towing vehicle. If the coupling ball or other items do obscure the rear registration plate they shall be removable or repositionable without the use of tools except, for example, an easily operated (i.e. an effort not exceeding 20 Nm) release key which is carried in the vehicle.

| 1.2. | Attachment of coupling heads |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

Attachment of coupling heads

| 1.2.1. | Class B coupling heads are permitted for trailers of maximum mass up to and including 3,5 tonnes. With the trailer horizontal and carrying the maximum permitted axle load, coupling heads shall be fitted so that the centre line of the spherical area into which the ball fits is 430 ±35 mm above the horizontal plane on which the wheels of the trailer rest.
  In the case of caravans and goods trailers, the horizontal position is regarded as when the floor or loading surface is horizontal. In the case of trailers without such a reference surface (e.g. boat trailers or similar) the trailer manufacturer shall give an appropriate reference line defining the horizontal position. The height requirement shall apply only to trailers intended to be attached to vehicles mentioned in paragraph 1.1.1. of this annex.
  In all cases the horizontal position shall be determined to within ±1o. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.1.

Class B coupling heads are permitted for trailers of maximum mass up to and including 3,5 tonnes. With the trailer horizontal and carrying the maximum permitted axle load, coupling heads shall be fitted so that the centre line of the spherical area into which the ball fits is 430 ±35 mm above the horizontal plane on which the wheels of the trailer rest.

In the case of caravans and goods trailers, the horizontal position is regarded as when the floor or loading surface is horizontal. In the case of trailers without such a reference surface (e.g. boat trailers or similar) the trailer manufacturer shall give an appropriate reference line defining the horizontal position. The height requirement shall apply only to trailers intended to be attached to vehicles mentioned in paragraph 1.1.1. of this annex.

In all cases the horizontal position shall be determined to within ±1o.

| 1.2.2. | It shall be possible to operate the coupling heads safely within the free space of the coupling ball given in Figures 25a and 25b, up to angles of α = 25o and β = 60o. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.2.

It shall be possible to operate the coupling heads safely within the free space of the coupling ball given in Figures 25a and 25b, up to angles of α = 25o and β = 60o.

| 1.3. | Attachment of drawbar couplings and mounting blocks |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

Attachment of drawbar couplings and mounting blocks

| 1.3.1. | Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings:
  In the case of types of standard drawbar couplings the mounting dimensions on the vehicle given in Figure 15 and Table 10 must be met. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.1.

Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings:

In the case of types of standard drawbar couplings the mounting dimensions on the vehicle given in Figure 15 and Table 10 must be met.

| 1.3.2. | Need for remote controlled couplings
  If one or more of the following requirements regarding easy and safe operation (paragraph 1.3.3.), accessibility (paragraph 1.3.5.) or clearance for the hand lever (paragraph 1.3.6.) cannot be met, a coupling with a remote control device as described in annex 5, paragraph 12.3. shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.2.

Need for remote controlled couplings

If one or more of the following requirements regarding easy and safe operation (paragraph 1.3.3.), accessibility (paragraph 1.3.5.) or clearance for the hand lever (paragraph 1.3.6.) cannot be met, a coupling with a remote control device as described in annex 5, paragraph 12.3. shall be used.

| 1.3.3. | Easy and safe coupling operation
  Drawbar couplings shall be mounted on the vehicle in such a manner that they are easy and safe to operate.
  In addition to the functions of opening (and closing, if applicable) this also includes checking the position of the indicator for the closed and locked positions of the coupling pin (by sight and touch).
  In the area in which the person operating the coupling has to stand, there shall not be any points of possible danger such as sharp edges, corners, etc. inherent in the design unless these are protected so that injury is unlikely.
  The way of escape from this area shall not be restricted or barred on either side by any objects attached to either the coupling or the vehicles.
  Any underrun protection device shall not prevent the person adopting a suitable position to operate the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.3.

Easy and safe coupling operation

Drawbar couplings shall be mounted on the vehicle in such a manner that they are easy and safe to operate.

In addition to the functions of opening (and closing, if applicable) this also includes checking the position of the indicator for the closed and locked positions of the coupling pin (by sight and touch).

In the area in which the person operating the coupling has to stand, there shall not be any points of possible danger such as sharp edges, corners, etc. inherent in the design unless these are protected so that injury is unlikely.

The way of escape from this area shall not be restricted or barred on either side by any objects attached to either the coupling or the vehicles.

Any underrun protection device shall not prevent the person adopting a suitable position to operate the coupling.

| 1.3.4. | Minimum angle for coupling up and uncoupling
  Coupling and uncoupling of the drawbar eye shall be possible when the longitudinal axis of the drawbar eye in relation to the centre line of the jaw is simultaneously rotated:
  50o horizontally to right or left;
  6o vertically up or down.
  6o axially to right or left.
  This requirement shall also apply to Class K hook type couplings. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.4.

Minimum angle for coupling up and uncoupling

Coupling and uncoupling of the drawbar eye shall be possible when the longitudinal axis of the drawbar eye in relation to the centre line of the jaw is simultaneously rotated:

50o horizontally to right or left;

6o vertically up or down.

6o axially to right or left.

This requirement shall also apply to Class K hook type couplings.

| 1.3.5. | Accessibility
  The distance between the centre of the coupling pin and the edge of the bodywork of the vehicle shall not exceed 550 mm. Where the distance exceeds 420 mm, the coupling shall be fitted with an actuation mechanism which will allow safe operation at a maximum distance of 420 mm from the outer board of the bodywork.
  The distance of 550 mm may be exceeded as follows, provided that technical necessity can be demonstrated and that easy and safe actuation of the drawbar coupling is not adversely affected:






  (i) | to a distance of up to 650 mm for vehicles with tipping bodies or rear‐mounted equipment; |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.3.5.

Accessibility

The distance between the centre of the coupling pin and the edge of the bodywork of the vehicle shall not exceed 550 mm. Where the distance exceeds 420 mm, the coupling shall be fitted with an actuation mechanism which will allow safe operation at a maximum distance of 420 mm from the outer board of the bodywork.

The distance of 550 mm may be exceeded as follows, provided that technical necessity can be demonstrated and that easy and safe actuation of the drawbar coupling is not adversely affected:

(i)

to a distance of up to 650 mm for vehicles with tipping bodies or rear‐mounted equipment;

| (ii) | to a distance of up to 1,320 mm if the unobstructed height is at least 1,150 mm; |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

to a distance of up to 1,320 mm if the unobstructed height is at least 1,150 mm;

| (iii) | in the case of car transporters with at least two loading levels when the trailer vehicle is not separated from the towing vehicle in normal transport operation. |
| --- | --- |

(iii)

in the case of car transporters with at least two loading levels when the trailer vehicle is not separated from the towing vehicle in normal transport operation.

| 1.3.6. | Clearance for the hand lever
  In order to permit safe operation of drawbar couplings there shall be adequate free space around the hand lever.
  The clearance illustrated in Figure 26 is regarded as sufficient.
  If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest size of coupling of the appropriate class given in annex 5, paragraph 3. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.6.

Clearance for the hand lever

In order to permit safe operation of drawbar couplings there shall be adequate free space around the hand lever.

The clearance illustrated in Figure 26 is regarded as sufficient.

If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest size of coupling of the appropriate class given in annex 5, paragraph 3.

Figure 26

Hand lever clearance

Image

The clearance dimensions are also applicable as appropriate for drawbar couplings having hand levers pointing downwards or of a different design.

The clearance shall also be maintained within the specified minimum angle for coupling up and uncoupling given in paragraph 1.3.4 of this annex.

| 1.3.7. | Clearance for free movement of drawbar coupling
  The drawbar coupling attached to the vehicle shall have a minimum clear gap of 10 mm from every other part of the vehicle taking into account all possible geometrical positions given in annex 5, paragraph 3.
  If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle type, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest possible coupling of the appropriate class stated in annex 5, paragraph 3. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.7.

Clearance for free movement of drawbar coupling

The drawbar coupling attached to the vehicle shall have a minimum clear gap of 10 mm from every other part of the vehicle taking into account all possible geometrical positions given in annex 5, paragraph 3.

If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle type, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest possible coupling of the appropriate class stated in annex 5, paragraph 3.

| 1.3.8. | Acceptability of drawbar couplings with a special joint for vertical rotation — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4.
  Couplings having a cylindrical pin and which achieve vertical rotation for the coupled drawbar eye by means of a special joint will only be permitted when technical necessity can be demonstrated. This may be the case, for example, on rear tippers when the coupling head shall be hinged, or with the couplings of heavy transporters when for strength reasons the use of a cylindrical coupling pin is necessary. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.8.

Acceptability of drawbar couplings with a special joint for vertical rotation — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4.

Couplings having a cylindrical pin and which achieve vertical rotation for the coupled drawbar eye by means of a special joint will only be permitted when technical necessity can be demonstrated. This may be the case, for example, on rear tippers when the coupling head shall be hinged, or with the couplings of heavy transporters when for strength reasons the use of a cylindrical coupling pin is necessary.

| 1.4. | Attachment of drawbar eyes and drawbars on trailers. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Attachment of drawbar eyes and drawbars on trailers.

| 1.4.1. | Drawbars for centre axle trailers shall have a support device which is adjustable in height if bearing mass at the drawbar eye on the trailer exceeds 50 kg, when the trailer is uniformly loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.1.

Drawbars for centre axle trailers shall have a support device which is adjustable in height if bearing mass at the drawbar eye on the trailer exceeds 50 kg, when the trailer is uniformly loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass.

| 1.4.2. | When attaching drawbar eyes and drawbar to centre‐axle trailers with a maximum mass, C, of more than 3,5 tonnes and more than one axle, the trailers shall be equipped with device for axle load sharing. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.2.

When attaching drawbar eyes and drawbar to centre‐axle trailers with a maximum mass, C, of more than 3,5 tonnes and more than one axle, the trailers shall be equipped with device for axle load sharing.

| 1.4.3. | Hinged drawbars shall be clear of the ground. They shall not fall below a height of 200 mm from the ground when released from the horizontal position. See also annex 5, paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.3.

Hinged drawbars shall be clear of the ground. They shall not fall below a height of 200 mm from the ground when released from the horizontal position. See also annex 5, paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4.

| 1.5. | Attachment of fifth wheel couplings, mounting plates and coupling pins on vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Attachment of fifth wheel couplings, mounting plates and coupling pins on vehicles.

| 1.5.1. | Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall not be mounted directly on the vehicle frame unless permitted by the vehicle manufacturer. They shall be fixed to the frame by means of a mounting plate and the installation instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer and coupling manufacturer shall be followed. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.1.

Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall not be mounted directly on the vehicle frame unless permitted by the vehicle manufacturer. They shall be fixed to the frame by means of a mounting plate and the installation instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer and coupling manufacturer shall be followed.

| 1.5.2. | Semitrailers shall be equipped with landing gear or any other equipment which allows uncoupling and parking of the semitrailer. If semitrailers are equipped so that the connection of the coupling devices, the electrical systems and braking systems can be effected automatically, the trailer shall have landing gear which retracts from the ground automatically after the semitrailer has been coupled up.
  These requirements shall not apply in the case of semitrailers designed for special operations where they are normally only separated in a workshop or when loading and unloading in specifically designed operating areas. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.2.

Semitrailers shall be equipped with landing gear or any other equipment which allows uncoupling and parking of the semitrailer. If semitrailers are equipped so that the connection of the coupling devices, the electrical systems and braking systems can be effected automatically, the trailer shall have landing gear which retracts from the ground automatically after the semitrailer has been coupled up.

These requirements shall not apply in the case of semitrailers designed for special operations where they are normally only separated in a workshop or when loading and unloading in specifically designed operating areas.

| 1.5.3. | The fixing of the fifth wheel coupling pin to the mounting plate on the semitrailer shall be as instructed by the vehicle manufacturer or the manufacturer of the fifth wheel coupling pin. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.3.

The fixing of the fifth wheel coupling pin to the mounting plate on the semitrailer shall be as instructed by the vehicle manufacturer or the manufacturer of the fifth wheel coupling pin.

| 1.5.4. | If a semitrailer is equipped with a steering wedge it shall meet the requirements as described in annex 5, paragraph 7.8. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.4.

If a semitrailer is equipped with a steering wedge it shall meet the requirements as described in annex 5, paragraph 7.8.

2.   REMOTE INDICATION AND CONTROL

| 2.1. | When installing remote indication and control devices any relevant requirements given in annex 5, paragraph 12 shall be taken into account. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

When installing remote indication and control devices any relevant requirements given in annex 5, paragraph 12 shall be taken into account.

---

(1)  See definitions in Regulation No 13 annexed to the 1958 Agreement concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of these Prescriptions. The definition is also contained in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3) (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

ANNEX 7

Appendix 1

LOADING CONDITIONS FOR MEASUREMENT OF COUPLING BALL HEIGHT

| 1. | The height shall be as specified in annex 7, paragraph 1.1.1. |
| --- | --- |

1.

The height shall be as specified in annex 7, paragraph 1.1.1.

| 2. | In the case of M1 category vehicles (1) the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be declared by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be given in the Communication form (annex 2). The mass shall be either the maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the vehicle manufacturer or the mass given by loading the vehicle in accordance with paragraph 2.1 of this appendix. |
| --- | --- |

2.

In the case of M1 category vehicles (1) the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be declared by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be given in the Communication form (annex 2). The mass shall be either the maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the vehicle manufacturer or the mass given by loading the vehicle in accordance with paragraph 2.1 of this appendix.

| 2.1. | The maximum figure for the mass in running order as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2); plus |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

The maximum figure for the mass in running order as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2); plus

| 2.1.1. | two masses, each of 68 kg, positioned in the outer seating position of each row of seats, with the seats in the rearmost adjustable position for normal driving and travel, and with the masses located: |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.

two masses, each of 68 kg, positioned in the outer seating position of each row of seats, with the seats in the rearmost adjustable position for normal driving and travel, and with the masses located:

| 2.1.1.1. | for original equipment coupling devices and components submitted for approval by the vehicle manufacturer, approximately at a point located at 100 mm in front of the “R” point for adjustable seats and 50 mm in front of the “R” point for other seats, the “R” point being determined according to Regulation No 14 paragraph 5.1.1.2.; or |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.1.

for original equipment coupling devices and components submitted for approval by the vehicle manufacturer, approximately at a point located at 100 mm in front of the “R” point for adjustable seats and 50 mm in front of the “R” point for other seats, the “R” point being determined according to Regulation No 14 paragraph 5.1.1.2.; or

| 2.1.1.2. | for coupling devices and components submitted for approval by an independent manufacturer and intended for replacement market fitting, approximately at the position of a seated person; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.2.

for coupling devices and components submitted for approval by an independent manufacturer and intended for replacement market fitting, approximately at the position of a seated person;

| 2.1.2. | In addition, for each mass of 68 kg, an additional mass of 7 kg allowance for personal luggage shall be distributed evenly in the luggage area of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.

In addition, for each mass of 68 kg, an additional mass of 7 kg allowance for personal luggage shall be distributed evenly in the luggage area of the vehicle;

| 3. | In the case of N1 category vehicles (2), the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be: |
| --- | --- |

3.

In the case of N1 category vehicles (2), the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be:

| 3.1. | The maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2). |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

The maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2).

---

(1)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), annex 7 (Document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

(2)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), annex 7 (Document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

---

Corrigenda

| 4.7.2006 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 181/111 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

4.7.2006

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 181/111

---

Corrigendum to Council Regulation (EC) No 1175/2005 of 18 July 2005 imposing a definitive anti-dumping duty and collecting definitively the provisional duty imposed on imports of barium carbonate originating in the People's Republic of China

(
  Official Journal L 189 of 21 July 2005
  )

On page 17 in recital 20, page 21 in recital 47 and page 22, Article 1(2):

for:

‘Zaozhuang Yongli Chemical Co.’,

read:

‘Zaozhuang Yongli Chemical Co. Ltd’.

---